- Manuals
- Brands
- Volvo
- Convertible
- C70
- Owner's Manual
Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual PDF
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:17:50+01:00; Page 1
evastarck
VOLVO C70
Owners Manual
WEB EDITION
DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your
Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of
you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the
world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current
safety and environmental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend
that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions
and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 1
evastarck
Table of contents
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00 00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8
Volvo and the environment....................... 11
01 01 Safety
Seatbelts................................................... 16
Airbag system........................................... 19
Airbags (SRS)............................................ 20
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*. 23
Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 25
Inflatable Curtain (DMIC)........................... 27
WHIPS....................................................... 28
Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)........ 30
When the systems deploy......................... 31
Crash mode.............................................. 33
Child safety............................................... 34 02 02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars.................. 40
Overview, right-hand drive cars................ 42
Driver's door control panel....................... 44
Combined instrument panel...................... 45
Indicator and warning symbols................. 46
Information display................................... 50
Electrical socket........................................ 52
Lighting panel........................................... 53
Left-hand stalk switch............................... 55
Right-hand stalk switch............................ 58
Cruise control*.......................................... 60
Keypad in the steering wheel*.................. 62
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warn- ing flashers................................................ 63
Parking brake............................................ 64
Power windows......................................... 65
Rearview and door mirrors....................... 67
Personal preferences................................ 70
HomeLink EU*......................................... 73
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 2
evastarck
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03 03 Climate control
General information on climate control..... 78
Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 80
Air distribution........................................... 84
Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................... 85
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)......... 88
04 04 Interior
Front seats................................................ 92
Electrically operated roof ......................... 95
Wind deflector*......................................... 99
Interior lighting........................................ 100
Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 102
Cargo area.............................................. 106
05 05 Locks and alarm
Remote control with key blade............... 112
Privacy locking*....................................... 115
Active locks............................................. 117
Keyless drive*.......................................... 118
Battery in remote control........................ 121
Locking and unlocking............................ 122
Alarm*...................................................... 126
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 3
evastarck
Table of contents
4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 06 Starting and driving
General.................................................... 132
Refuelling................................................ 134
Starting the engine.................................. 136
Keyless drive*.......................................... 138
Manual gearbox...................................... 139
Automatic gearbox.................................. 141
Brake system.......................................... 145
DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem*......................................................... 147
Park Assist*............................................. 149
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 151
Towing and recovery.............................. 155
Start assistance...................................... 158
Driving with a trailer................................ 159
Towing equipment*................................. 161
Detachable towbar*................................ 163
Loading................................................... 167
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 168
07 07 Wheels and tyres
General.................................................... 172
Tyre pressure.......................................... 176
Warning triangle* and spare wheel......... 179
Changing wheels.................................... 182
Emergency puncture repair*................... 184
08 08 Car care
Cleaning.................................................. 190
Touching up paintwork........................... 194
Rustproofing........................................... 195
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 4
evastarck
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5
09 09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service........................................... 198
Self-maintenance.................................... 199
Bonnet and engine compartment........... 200
Oils and fluids......................................... 201
Wiper blades........................................... 206
Battery..................................................... 207
Replacing bulbs...................................... 209
Fuses....................................................... 215 10 10 Infotainment system
General.................................................... 224
Audio functions....................................... 226
Radio functions....................................... 230
CD functions........................................... 235
Menu structure audio system.............. 238
Phone functions*..................................... 239
Menu structure phone*......................... 246
Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 249 11 11 Specifications
Type designation..................................... 256
Dimensions and weights......................... 258
Engine specifications.............................. 260
Engine oil................................................ 262
Fluids and lubricants............................... 266
Fuel......................................................... 268
Catalytic converter.................................. 272
Electrical system..................................... 273
Type approval......................................... 275
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 5
evastarck
Table of contents
6
12 12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 276
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 6
evastarck
Table of contents
7
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 7
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
8
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different sit-
uations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not present in all cars . In addition to
standard equipment, this manual also
describes options (factory fitted equipment)
and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment). If you are uncertain over what is
standard or option/accessory then contact
your Volvo dealer.
Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-
ments of different markets, as well as for
national or local legal requirements and regu-
lations.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
Volvo Car Corporation
Option All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk .
The range of options/accessories for the dif-
ferent car models varies depending on the mar-
ket. The majority of options are factory fitted
and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-
rofitted.
Contact your authorised Volvo dealer for more
information.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.
Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
sage texts on the information display (e.g.
Audio settings).
Decals The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 8
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
9
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Dan-
gerous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in serious personal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G 03
15 92
White ISO symbols on black symbol field, white
text/image on black message field. If a colour
is required then the decal shall be blue. Dan-
gerous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate damage to prop-
erty.
Information
G 03
15 93
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 9
evastarck
Introduction
Important information
10
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different com-
ponents are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the next
double-page spread.
Recording data
One or more of the computers in your Volvo are
capable of recording detailed information. This
information is intended for use in research to
enhance safety and for diagnosing faults in
some of the in-car systems. The data may
include details regarding seatbelt use by the
driver and passengers, the functions of various
vehicle systems and modules, and status infor-
mation about the engine, throttle, steering,
brakes and other systems. This data can also
include details of the way the car is driven. This
type of information can include, without being
limited to, specific details such as vehicle
speed, the use of the brake and accelerator
pedals and steering wheel position. This latter
type of data can be stored for a limited period
while the car is being driven and subsequently
during a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car
Corporation will not disclose the stored infor-
mation without consent. However, Volvo Car
Corporation may be forced to disclose the
information due to national legislation. Volvo
Car Corporation and its authorised workshops
may also read and use the information.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Always
contact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 10
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G 00
00 00
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values which influence all opera-
tions. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
EPI (Environmental Product Information) is
supplied for all Volvo models. Here you can see
how the environment is affected during the
entire lifecycle of the car.
Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI.
Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emis-
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-
sumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 11
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic
outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
sant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials. This
means that they also fulfil the requirements in
the Oeko-Tex 100 standard 1, a major advance
towards a healthier passenger compartment
environment.
Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-
pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the
upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning
with plant substances and fulfils the certifica-
tion requirements.
Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. We make clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental
impact, for example, by driving economically
and by servicing and maintaining the car
according to the instructions in the owner's
manual.
The following advice will help you to do your bit
for the environment: (for further advice on how
you can reduce environmental impact and
drive economically, see page 132).
Decrease fuel consumption by choosing ECO tyre pressure, see page 176.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. Remove them directly after use.
Remove unnecessary items from the car. The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
If the car is equipped with an engine block heater, always use it before starting from cold. This reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions.
Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.
Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down.
Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention to local regulations. Switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. If uncer- tain about disposal, consult an authorised Volvo workshop for advice.
Service your car regularly.
High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.
These hints will help reduce fuel consumption
without increasing travel time or lessening the
enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to
1 More information on www.oekotex.com
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 12
evastarck
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
13
your car, you'll be saving money - and the
Earth's resources.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 13
evastarck
G 02
08 71
14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16
Airbag system......................................................................................... 19
Airbags (SRS).......................................................................................... 20
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*............................................... 23
Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 25
Inflatable Curtain (DMIC)......................................................................... 27
WHIPS..................................................................................................... 28
Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)...................................................... 30
When the systems deploy....................................................................... 31
Crash mode............................................................................................. 33
Child safety............................................................................................. 34
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 14
evastarck
01 SAFETY
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 15
evastarck
01 Safety
Seatbelts01
16
General information
G 02
01 04
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi- tioned low down.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts. It is important
that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can
provide maximum protection. Do not lean the
backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed
to protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud
"click" indicates that the seatbelt has
locked.
Releasing the seatbelt Press the red lock button and then let the
seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly.
during braking and acceleration.
if the car leans heavily.
Keep in mind the following:
do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in a collision, the entire seat- belt must be replaced. Some of the seat- belt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam- age. The new seatbelt must be type- approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
WARNING
The rear seat is designed for a maximum of two passengers.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 16
evastarck
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G 02
01 05
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section of the seat-
belt should wrap over the shoulder then be
routed between the breasts and to the side of
the abdomen. The lap section of the seatbelt
should lay flat over the thighs and as low as
possible under the abdomen. It must never
be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack
from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits close to
the body. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-
tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-
ble between their abdomen and the steering
wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G 02
96 52
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time depend-
ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. A message is shown in the information display when the seatbelts are used. The message is automatically cleared after approx. 30 sec- onds or can be acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during a journey. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning ceases when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button.
The message on the information display show-
ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-
able. Press the READ button to see stored
messages.
Certain markets An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the
driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first six seconds.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 17
evastarck
01 Safety
Seatbelts01
18
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with seatbelt
tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-
sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a
sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then
provides more effective restraint for occu-
pants.
Seatbelt guide
G 02
01 06
The seatbelt guide is fitted on both the driver's seat and passenger seat.
The seatbelt guide is an aid for providing better
access to the seatbelt. When getting into and
out of the rear seat, remove the seatbelt from
the seatbelt guide and position it furthest back
on the seatbelt bar. Refit the seatbelt into the
seatbelt guide afterwards.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 18
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbag system 01
19
Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel
G 02
90 41
The airbag system 1 is continually monitored by
the system's control module. The warning
symbol in the combined instrument panel illu-
minates when the ignition key is turned to posi-
tion I, II or III. The symbol goes out after
approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag sys-
tem1 is working correctly.
As well as the warning symbol, a
message may appear on the dis-
play in appropriate cases. If the
warning symbol malfunctions, the
warning triangle illuminates and
the message SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS
AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT appears in the display. Contact an
authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, SRS system or IC system. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop urgently.
1 Includes SRS and seatbelt tensioner, SIPS, DMIC and ROPS.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 19
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbags (SRS)01
20
Airbag system
G 02
01 11
SRS system, left-hand drive
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To
cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when
compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, takes place within
tenths of a second.
WARNING
Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer- ence in the airbag system could cause mal- function and result in serious personal injury.
G 02
01 10
SRS system, right-hand drive
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver's side and passenger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags is deployed.
The capacities of the airbags are also adap- ted to the collision force to which they are subjected.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 20
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbags (SRS) 01
21
G 02
01 13
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive and right-hand drive cars
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the instrument panel where the passenger air- bag is located.
Airbag (SRS) on the driver's side
G 02
01 08
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System) in the steering wheel to sup-
plement the protection afforded by the seatbelt
on the driver's side. This airbag is folded up
into the centre of the steering wheel. The steer-
ing wheel is marked SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag (SRS)
G 02
01 09
The car has an airbag 1 to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
ger side. This airbag is folded up into a
compartment above the glovebox. Its cover
panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and back against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.
1 Not all cars have a passenger airbag (SRS). This can be unselected when the car is ordered.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 21
evastarck
01 Safety
Airbags (SRS)01
22
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.2
Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas- senger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.
G 03
22 43
Location of decal for front passenger airbag.
2 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS) see page 23.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 22
evastarck
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)* 01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23
Key switch off - PACOS
General information The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat
can be deactivated if the car is equipped with
a PACOS switch. For information on how to
activate/deactivate, see under the heading
Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru-
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open, (see under the heading,
Switch PACOS). Check that the switch is in
the required position. Volvo recommends that
the key blade is used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 113.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag (SRS), but does not have a switch (PACOS), the airbag will always be acti- vated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the text message in the roof panel indicates that the airbag (SRS) is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
Activating/deactivating
G 01
98 00
Switch location.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 23
evastarck
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)*01
24 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
Messages
G 01
83 46
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag (SRS) is deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof panel
indicate that the airbag (SRS) for the front pas-
senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus-
tration).
G 01
83 44
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag (SRS) is activated.
A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates
that the airbag (SRS) for the front passenger
seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
NOTE
When the remote control is turned to ignition position II or III the warning symbol for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see page 19.
Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information on the different igni- tion positions, see page 136.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 24
evastarck
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
25
Side airbags SIPS bags
G 02
01 18
Side airbag locations.
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and are an important part of the
SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front
seat backrests.
WARNING
Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Any interference in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in seri- ous personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.
WARNING
Only use car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated 1 passenger
airbag.
SIPS bags
G 02
53 15
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 25
evastarck
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)01
26
G 02
53 16
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
G 03
22 46
Location of decal for side airbag, driver's side, front, left-hand drive car.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 26
evastarck
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (DMIC) 01
27
Properties
G 02
54 24
The inflatable curtain, DMIC (Door Mounted
Inflatable Curtain), is a supplement to the SIPS
system. It is fitted along the inside of the driv-
er's and passenger doors and protects both
front seat occupants. The inflatable curtain is
activated by sensors in the event of a suffi-
ciently violent collision or if the car is at risk of
overturning. When deployed, the inflatable cur-
tain inflates. The inflatable curtain helps to pre-
vent the driver and front seat passenger from
striking their heads on the inside of the car dur-
ing a collision. The inflatable curtain is
deployed irrespective of whether the roof is
open or closed.
G 02
54 25
WARNING
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
WARNING
There is a risk of personal injury if the driver or passenger is leaning against the door panel when the inflatable curtain deploys. This could also compromise the intended protection.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 27
evastarck
01 Safety
WHIPS01
28
Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS
G 02
03 47
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-
cially designed head restraints for the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the col-
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 28
evastarck
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
29
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
G 02
01 25
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seat appears to be undamaged.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked after even a minor rear-end collision.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 29
evastarck
01 Safety
Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)01
30
ROPS function
G 02
07 97
Roll bars in raised position.
The ROPS system consists of strong roll bars
which are located behind the passengers'
head restraints, as well as sensors. In the event
of a situation where the car is at risk of over-
turning, or in the event of a sufficiently violent
collision from behind, the sensors detect this
and the roll bars rise up behind the passengers'
heads. The roll bars are deployed irrespective
of whether the roof is open or closed.
Always contact an authorised Volvo workshop
if the ROPS system has deployed.
WARNING
Do not carry out any work on the ROPS sys- tem.
Do not place any objects on the ROPS sys- tem or behind the passengers' head restraints.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 30
evastarck
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
31
Activating the systems
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision and/or
overturning.
Seatbelt tensioner, rear seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning.
Airbags (SRS) A
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA
Inflatable Curtain DMIC In a side-impact accident and/or overturningA
Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision.
Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) In the event of overturning and/or collision from behind.
A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have been deployed, the follow-
ing is recommended:
Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Let an authorised Volvo workshop replace components in the car's safety system.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The SRS, SIPS, DMIC, belt tensioner and ROPS systems are deployed only once dur- ing a collision.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liq- uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 31
evastarck
In a frontal collision
01 Safety
When the systems deploy01
32
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 32
evastarck
01 Safety
Crash mode 01
33
Driving after a collision
G 02
90 42
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on
the information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the col-
lision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Firstly, remove the ignition key and then rein-
sert it. The car's electronics will then try to reset
themselves to normal mode. Then try to start
the car. If CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL is
still shown on the display then the car must not
be driven or towed. Even if the car appears to
be driveable, hidden damage may make the
car impossible to control once moving.
Moving the car If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH
MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the car
can be moved carefully out of a dangerous
position. Do not move the car further than nec-
essary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in crash mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Always allow an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to NORMAL MODE after CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in crash mode it must not be towed. It must be transported to an author- ised Volvo workshop.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 33
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
34
Children should sit comfortably and safely
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size. For more information, see
page 35.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo's own child safety equipment is
designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine
equipment to best ensure that the mounting
points and attachments are correctly posi-
tioned and are sufficiently strong.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G 02
01 28
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
Volvo has child safety products that are
designed for and tested by Volvo.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included with the product.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-
age the straps.
Allow the back of the child seat to rest against
the dashboard. This applies to cars without a
passenger airbag, or where the airbag is deac-
tivated.
Location of child seats You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger
airbag is not activated 1.
a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that uses the back of the front seat as support.
Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. A child in the front
passenger seat could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 34
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety 01
35
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.2
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
Label located on instrument panel end face.
Placement of children in the car 3
Weight/age Front seat A Rear seat
Group 0
max. 10 kg
(0 9 months)
Group 0+
max. 13 kg
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with
the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion
between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt, straps and support legs. B
Type approval: E5 03135
Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child seat, secured
with the ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 03301146
Britax Baby Safe Plus rear-facing child seat, secured with
the ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 03301146
2 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS) see page 23. 3 With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 35
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety01
36
Weight/age Front seat A Rear seat
Group 1
9 18 kg
(9 36 months)
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with
the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion
between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.B
Type approval: E5 03135
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system and straps.B
Type approval: E5 03171
Group 2/3
15 36 kg
(3 12 years)
Volvo Booster cushion with or without backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
Volvo Booster cushion with or without backrest.
Type approval: E5 03139
A For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 23. B To install a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, contact an authorised Volvo dealer to have the mounting points installed.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.4
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.
4 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS) see page 23.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 36
evastarck
01 Safety
Child safety 01
37
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
G 02
07 98
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see
illustration above).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 37
evastarck
G 02
09 01
38 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................ 40
Overview, right-hand drive cars.............................................................. 42
Driver's door control panel...................................................................... 44
Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 45
Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 46
Information display.................................................................................. 50
Electrical socket...................................................................................... 52
Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 53
Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 55
Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 58
Cruise control*........................................................................................ 60
Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................. 62
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers............................. 63
Parking brake.......................................................................................... 64
Power windows....................................................................................... 65
Rearview and door mirrors...................................................................... 67
Personal preferences.............................................................................. 70
HomeLink EU*....................................................................................... 73
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 38
evastarck
02 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 39
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
40
268151210 11 13 14 8 23 24 25
27
30
31
29
3
28
8
7
32
34
33
9
7
6
8
9
16
17
18 22
20
21
19
3
2
1
5
4
G 02
82 06
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 40
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
41
Steering wheel adjustment
Opening handle, bonnet
Control panel, windows and door mirrors
Direction indicators, main beam, trip com-
puter
Lighting panel and fuel filler flap opener
Door handle and lock button.
Indicator lamp, locking
Air vents, dashboard
Air vent for side window
Cruise control
Horn and airbags
Combined instrument panel
Keypad for infotainment system
Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp
washers
Ignition switch
Rearview mirror, interior
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-
bag indicator
Switch, interior lighting, left-hand side
Switch, optional equipment
Switch, passenger compartment auto-
matic lighting
Switch, optional equipment
Switch, passenger compartment lighting,
right-hand side
Display, car settings/audio system etc.
Controls, car settings/audio system etc.
Climate control
Indicator lamp, hazard warning flashers
Door handle and lock button
Glovebox
Gear lever (manual)/gear selector (auto-
matic)
Electrical socket and cigarette lighter
Switch, roof control
Parking brake
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 41
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
42
269 2523201110 12 9 21 22 24
7
34
33
27
4
30
31
28
29
8
9
3
8
6
2
9
7
4
5
32
1
19
18
17 13
15
14
16
G 01
94 91
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 42
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
43
Electrical socket and cigarette lighter
Switch, roof control
Parking brake
Control panel, windows and door mirrors
Glovebox
Door handle and lock button
Indicator lamp, locking
Air vent for side window
Air vents in dashboard
Climate control
Controls, car settings/audio system etc.
Display, car settings/audio system etc.
Switch, interior lighting, left-hand side
Switch, optional equipment
Switch, passenger compartment auto-
matic lighting
Switch, optional equipment
Switch, passenger compartment lighting,
right-hand side
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-
bag indicator
Rearview mirror, interior
Ignition switch
Stalk switch, left
Keypad, steering wheel, left
Combined instrument panel
Horn and airbags
Keypad, steering wheel, right
Indicator lamp, hazard warning flashers
Door handle and lock button
Lighting panel and fuel filler flap opener
Stalk switch, right
Opening handle, bonnet
Lever, steering wheel adjustment
Gear lever (manual)/gear selector (auto-
matic)
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 43
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Driver's door control panel
02
44
Driver's door control panel
G 01
82 41
Power windows, all windows down/up
Power windows
Door mirror, left-hand side
Door mirrors, setting
Door mirror, right-hand side
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 44
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
02
45
G 02
90 46
Speedometer.
Direction indicators, left.
Warning symbol.
Information display The display presents
information or warning messages, outside
temperature and clock. When the outside
temperature is between +2 C and -5 C a
snowflake symbol appears on the display.
This warns of icy roads. The outside tem-
perature gauge may show a slightly high
reading after the car has been stationary.
Information symbol.
Direction indicator, right.
Tachometer Indicates engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Indicator and warning symbols.
Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, pag
e 56.
Main beam indicator.
Display Display for automatic gear posi-
tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and
cruise control.
Button for trip meter Used to measure
short distances. Short presses on the but-
ton switches between the two trip meters
T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec-
onds) resets an active trip meter to zero.
Temperature gauge - Used for the engine
cooling system. A message will appear on
the display if the temperature becomes too
high and the gauge goes into the red zone.
Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front
of the air intake, for example, reduce the
cooling capacity at high outside tempera-
tures and high engine loads.
Indicator and warning symbols.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 45
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
46
Functionality check, symbols
All indicator and warning symbols 1 illuminate
when the ignition key is turned to position II
before starting. This is to check that the sym-
bols are working. When the engine starts, all
the symbols should go out except the hand-
brake symbol, which only goes out when the
brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start within
five seconds, all symbols extin-
guish except the symbols for a
fault in the car's emissions system
and for low oil pressure. Certain
symbols may have no function,
depending on the car's specifica-
tions.
Symbols in the centre of the instrument panel
G 03
07 55
The red warning symbol illumi-
nates when a fault has been indi-
cated which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
information display at the same time. The sym-
bol remains visible until the fault has been rec-
tified but the text message can be cleared with
the READ button, see page 50. The warning
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
When the symbol illuminates:
1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accord-
ance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using READ.
The yellow information symbol illu-
minates and a text appears on the
information display. The message
text is cleared using the READ but-
ton, see page 50, or disappears
automatically after a period of time (time
depending on which function is indicated).
The yellow information symbol can also illumi-
nate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or disappear automatically after a time.
1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 50.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 46
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47
Indicator symbols left-hand side
G 02
90 48
Fault in car's emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp
Stability system STC or DSTC
No function
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to an
authorised Volvo workshop to
have the system checked.
ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS func-
tion.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. Drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to
have the ABS checked if the symbol
remains lit.
Rear fog lamp This symbol is lit when the rear fog
lamp is on.
Stability system STC or DSTC* For information on the system's
functions and symbols, see
page 147.
Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during
engine preheating. Preheating
occurs when the temperature is
below 2 C. The car can be
started once the symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the
level in the fuel tank is low, refuel
as soon as possible.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 47
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
48
Indicator symbols right-hand side
G 02
90 49
Indicator symbol for trailer
Parking brake applied
Airbags SRS
Low oil pressure
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Indicator symbol for trailer This symbol flashes when the
direction indicators are used and
the trailer is connected. If the sym-
bol does not flash then one of the
lamps on the trailer or the car is
faulty.
Parking brake applied The symbol illuminates when the
parking brake is applied. Always
pull the parking brake lever to the
end position.
NOTE
The symbol illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.
Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, it
means a fault has been detected in
the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC system. Drive directly to an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the system
checked.
Low oil pressure 2
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pres-
sure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal,
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates if someone
in a front seat has not put on their
seatbelt or if someone in a rear
seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging If this symbol illuminates while
driving, a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low.
Stop the car in a safe place and check the
level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 204. If the level in the reservoir is
2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 50.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 48
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
49
below MIN the car should not be driven any
further. Have the car transported to an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
brake system checked.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols
illuminate at the same time, there
may be a fault in the brake force
distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-
ing.
4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 204.
5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the
symbols are still lit, the car can be driven,
with great care, to an authorised Volvo
workshop to have the brake system
checked.
6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN
then the car should not be driven any fur-
ther. Have the car transported to an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
brake system checked.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Reminder doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet 3 or the boot lid
is not properly closed, the driver will be
reminded of this.
Low speed If the car moves at a speed less
than 5 km/h, the information sym-
bol illuminates and DRIVER
DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER
DOOR OPEN or BONNET OPEN is shown on the display. Stop the car safely as
soon as possible and close the door or bonnet.
High speed If the car is moving faster than
10 km/h, the symbol illuminates
and one of the texts indicated in
the preceding paragraph appears
on the display.
Boot lid reminder If the boot lid is open, this informa-
tion symbol will illuminate and
BOOT LID OPEN will appear on
the display.
3 Only cars with alarm.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 49
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
50
Messages
G 02
90 50
When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates
the information display shows a supplemen-
tary message.
Press the READ button (1).
Switch between messages with the READ but-
ton. Fault messages are stored in the memory
until the fault is rectified.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.
Message Specification
STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
SERVICE
URGENTA
Have the car
checked by an
authorised Volvo
workshop immedi-
ately.
SEE MANUALA Read the Owner's
Manual.
SERVICE
REQUIREDA
Have the car
checked by an
authorised Volvo
workshop as soon
as possible.
HIGH ENGINE
TEMP STOP
ENGINE
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
BOOK TIME FOR
SERVICE
Time to book regular
service at an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop.
Message Specification
TIME FOR SERV-
ICE
Time for regular
service at an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop. The timing is
determined by the
number of kilome-
tres driven, number
of months since the
last service, engine
running time and oil
grade.
MAINTENANCE
OVERDUE
If the service inter-
vals are not followed
then the warranty
does not cover any
damaged parts.
Contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop for service.
TRANSMISSION
OIL CHANGE NEE-
DED
Have the car
checked by an
authorised Volvo
workshop as soon
as possible.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 50
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
51
Message Specification
REMINDER
CHECK OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level.
The message is
shown every
10 000 km (certain
engine variants). For
information on
checking the oil
level, see page 202.
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE MAN-
UAL
Diesel particle filter
requires regenera-
tion, see page 270.
STC/DSTC SPIN
CONTROL OFF
The function of the
stability and traction
control system is
reduced, see
page 148 for more
variants.
TRANSMISSION
PERFORMANCE
LOW
The gearbox cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive carefully until
the message clears,
see page 143.
If shown repeatedly:
Contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop.
Message Specification
TRANSMISSION
OIL TEMP HIGH
Drive more smoothly
or stop the car in a
safe manner. Disen-
gage the gear and
run the engine at
idling speed until the
message clears.
TRANSMISSION
HOT STOP
SAFELY
Critical fault. Stop
the car immediately
in a safe manner.
Contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop.
A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 51
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
02
52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
12 V electrical socket
G 01
96 21
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers
and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For
the socket to supply current, the ignition key
must be in at least position I.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.
Cigarette lighter* Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 52
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53
General
G 02
01 39
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
Light switches
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Front fog lamps*
Opening the fuel filler flap
Rear fog lamp
Posi- tion
Specification
Automatic/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps.
Automatic dipped beam. Main
beam and main beam flash
work in this position.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam.
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the
end positions.
3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively
to raise or lower beam alignment.
Cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps* have auto-
matic headlamp levelling, so there is no control
(1).
Position/parking lamps.
Position/parking lamps can be switched on
irrespective of ignition key position.
Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre
position.
When the ignition key is in position II the posi-
tion/parking lamps and number plate lighting
are always on.
Headlamps
Automatic dipped beam* Dipped beam comes on automatically when
the ignition key is turned to position II, except
when the headlamp control (2) is in the centre
position. If necessary, the automatic dipped
beam can be deactivated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Automatic dipped beam, main beam 1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Dipped beam is activated by means of
turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise
to the end position.
3. Main beam is activated by means of mov-
ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the
steering wheel to the end position and
releasing it, see page 55.
The lamps are switched off automatically when
the ignition key is turned to position I or 0.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 53
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instrument lighting
The instrument lighting is switched on when
the ignition key is in position II and the head-
lamp control (2) is in one of the end positions.
The lighting is automatically dimmed during the
day and can be controlled manually at night.
Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter
or dimmer lighting.
Enhanced display lighting
To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,
clock and outside temperature gauge, these
illuminate when the car is unlocked and when
the key is removed from the ignition switch.
The displays extinguish when the car is locked.
Fog lamps
NOTE
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from country to country.
Front fog lamps* The front fog lamps can be switched on along
with the headlamps or the position lamps/park-
ing lamps.
Press the button (4).
The light in the button (4) illuminates when the
front fog lamps are switched on.
Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with
the headlamps or the front fog lamps.
Press the button (6).
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com-
bined instrument panel and the light in the
button (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is
switched on.
Fuel filler flap
Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when
the car is unlocked, see page 122.
Brake light
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
Emergency brake light and automatic
hazard warning flashers, EBL* Emergency Brake Lights (EBL) are activated in
the event of heavy braking or if the ABS brakes
are activated. This function means that the
brake light flashes to immediately alert cars
travelling behind.
The system is activated if ABS is used for more
than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy brak-
ing, however, only when braking from speeds
above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is
lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor-
mally again and the hazard warning flashers
are switched on automatically. The hazard
warning flashers remain on until the car accel-
erates again but can be deactivated with the
button for hazard warning flashers, see
page 63.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 54
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
55
Stalk switch positions
3 4
1
2
1
2
G 02
63 80
Short flash sequence, direction indicators
Continuous flash sequence, direction indi-
cators
Main beam flash and switching from main
to dipped beam
Home safe lighting and switching from
dipped to main beam
Direction indicators
Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to end
position (2).
The stalk switch remains in its end position and
is moved back manually, or automatically by
steering wheel movement.
Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to posi-
tion (1) and release.
The direction indicators flash three times and
the stalk switch returns to its home position.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to position (3).
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is
released. Main beam flash only works when the
ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Switching, main and dipped beam
The ignition key must be in position II and the
headlamp control in end position, see
page 53, for main beam to be switched on.
Activating main beam:
Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to the end position (4) and release.
Deactivating main beam:
Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to position (3) and release.
Home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked. The standard delay is
30 1 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90
seconds, see page 71.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to the end position (4) and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
1 Factory settings.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 55
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip computer*
G 02
90 52
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel 2 - browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list
RESET2 - resets
Controls To scroll through trip computer information
turn the thumbwheel either up or down in
steps. Continue turning to return to the starting
point.
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by pressing the READ button and revert to the trip computer function.
Functions The trip computer displays the following infor-
mation:
AVERAGE SPEED
ACTUAL SPEED MPH*
INSTANTANEOUS
AVERAGE
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
DSTC, see page 147
AVERAGE SPEED When the ignition is switched off, the average
speed is stored and used as the basis of the
new value when you continue driving. Reset
using the RESET button.
ACTUAL SPEED MPH Current speed is displayed in mph.
INSTANTANEOUS Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, " --.-" appears on the display.
During the period for regeneration 3 fuel con-
sumption may increase, see page 270.
AVERAGE The average fuel consumption is stored when
the ignition is switched off and remains until the
function is reset. Reset using the RESET but-
ton.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK The range to empty is calculated based on the
average fuel consumption over the last 30 km.
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows " --- km to empty tank". Refuel as
soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if fuel consumption is changed due to a change in driving style or if a fuel-driven heater is used for example.
2 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system. 3 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 56
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
57
Resetting 1. Select AVERAGE SPEED or AVERAGE
2. Reset with one press on the RESET but-
ton. Press and hold the RESET button for
at least five seconds to reset the average
speed and average consumption at the
same time.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 57
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Windscreen wipers
0
0
A
CB
G 02
54 19
Windscreen and headlamp washers
Rain sensor - On/Off
Thumbwheel
Windscreen wipers off The windscreen wipers are off
when the stalk switch is in position
0.
Single sweep Raise the stalk switch to make a
single sweep.
Intermittent wiping You can adjust and set a suitable
speed for intermittent wiping. Turn
the thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter
interval between sweeps. Turn it
down to increase the delay.
Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal
speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Windscreen/headlamp washer
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers. The wipers will make several more
sweeps once the stalk switch is released.
High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed as follows:
Dipped beam selected with the switch on light-
ing panel:
The headlamps are washed the first time the
windscreen is washed. Within the next ten
minutes, they are washed every fifth wash
cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer
interval the headlamps are washed each time.
Parking/position lamps selected with the
switch on the lighting panel:
Bi-Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.
Halogen headlamps are not washed.
The switch on the lighting panel is in position
0:
Bi-Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.
Halogen headlamps are not washed.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 58
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59
Rain sensor*
G 02
90 53
The rain sensor automatically activates the
windscreen wipers based on how much water
it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel (C), see page 58.
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen-
sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upwards).
On/Off When activating the rain sensor, the ignition
key must be in position I or II and the wind-
screen wiper stalk switch must be in position
0 (not activated).
Activating the rain sensor:
Press the button (B), see page 58. A display
symbol shows that the rain sensor is
active.
To turn the rain sensor off, either:
1. Press button (B)
2. Press the stalk switch downward to
another wiper program. If the stalk switch
is raised, the rain sensor will remain active,
the wipers make an extra sweep and then
return to rain sensor mode when the stalk
is released to position 0 (not activated), see
page 58.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the key is removed from the ignition
switch or five minutes after the ignition is
switched off.
IMPORTANT
At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while the ignition key is in position I or II. Other- wise, the windscreen wipers could start swiping and become damaged.
Thumbwheel Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of
wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is
selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain
sensor is selected.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 59
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating
G 02
01 41
The controls for cruise control are to the left of
the steering wheel.
Setting the desired speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is
shown on the combined instrument panel.
2. Touch + or to lock the vehicle speed.
CRUISE-ON appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds
below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.
Increasing or decreasing speed
G 02
90 54
Increase or decrease the speed by press-
ing and holding + or . The speed of the car
when the button is released is set as the
new speed.
A brief press (less than half a second) on + or
changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph 1.
NOTE
A temporary increase in speed (less than one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accel- erator, the car will return to the programmed speed.
Temporary disengagement
Press 0 to disengage the cruise control
temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the
combined instrument panel. The speed set
earlier is stored in the memory.
The cruise control is also temporarily disen-
gaged when:
the brake pedal or clutch pedal is depressed
speed falls below 2530 km/h1 when trav- elling uphill
the gear selector is moved to position N
a temporary increase in speed lasts longer than one minute.
1 Depending on engine type.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 60
evastarck
wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61
Return to the set speed Press this button to resume the
previously set speed. CRUISE
ON appears on the combined
instrument panel.
Disengaging
Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise
control. CRUISE ON clears on the com-
bined instrument panel.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 61
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Keypad in the steering wheel*
02
62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Button functions
G 02
01 42
The four buttons at the bottom of the steering
wheel keypad control the radio and the phone.
The function of a button depends on which
system is active. The steering wheel keypad
can be used to scroll between preset stations,
change CD tracks and adjust the volume.
Press and hold one of the arrow keys to
fast forward/reverse or search for the next
station.
The phone must be switched on to adjust audio
system settings. It must be activated with the
ENTERkey to enable control of the phone sys-
tem with the arrow keys.
To return to Audio only, press EXIT.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 62
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers
02
63
Steering wheel adjustment
G 02
01 43
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach.
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you best.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off, never while driving. Before driving, check that the steering wheel is fixed in position.
Hazard warning flashers
G 02
01 44
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction
indicators flash) when the car is stopped where
it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press
the button to activate the function.
A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking
activates the hazard warning flashers automat-
ically, see page 54. The function can be deac-
tivated with the button.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of hazard warning flashers vary from country to coun- try.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 63
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
02
64
Parking brake (handbrake)
G 01
82 60
The lever is located between the front seats.
NOTE
The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.
How to Apply the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to
its full extent.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever
must be pulled more firmly.
When parking a vehicle always put the gear
selector in position 1 (for manual transmission)
or P (for automatic transmission)
Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels
away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill; turn the
wheels toward the kerb.
How to release the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,
press the button, release the parking brake
lever and release the button.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 64
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
65
Operation
The power windows are operated using the
controls in the doors. The ignition key must be
in position I or II for the power windows to
operate.
The windows continue to work for a limited
amount of time when the car is stopped and
ignition key is removed, provided none of the
doors is opened. Operate the windows with
caution.
To open a window:
Depress the front of the control.
To close a window:
Raise the front of the control.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.
Remote control To operate the power windows with remote
control, see page 112.
WARNING
Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows. Pay close attention if the rear windows are controlled from the driver's door or if the windows are closed with the remote control.
Driver's door
G 00
00 00
Driver's door control panel.
Controls, all windows
Rear window controls
Front window controls
The driver can operate all of the power win-
dows from the driver's seat.
The windows can be opened and closed in two
ways:
Manual operation Depress one of the controls (2) or (3) gently or
raise it gently. The power window opens or
closes as long as the switch is actuated.
Automatic operation Fully depress one of the controls (3) or raise it,
then release. The side window will then open
or close automatically. If the window is
obstructed by an object, the movement will
stop. Only the front windows can be closed
automatically.
The control on the passenger door is operated
in the same way as on the driver's door.
All windows simultaneously All windows can be opened and closed simul-
taneously using button (1). The windows are
opened automatically with a short press on the
right-hand side of the button. Close by keeping
the left-hand side of the button pressed in.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 65
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
66
WARNING
The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of them being blocked works with both automatic and manual closing, although not with pinch protection deployed.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the ignition key if the driver leaves the car.
Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows.
Passenger seat
G 01
95 11
Passenger seat.
The control in the front passenger door oper-
ates that window only.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 66
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67
Interior rearview mirror
G 02
09 88
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Dipping Control for dimming
Normal position
Dimmed position.
Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1)
is not available in mirrors with automatic dim-
ming.
Interior rearview mirror with compass*
G 02
09 91
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Calibrating the compass
G 02
09 92
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographical area
to which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the
engine running at idling speed.
2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 sec-
onds. Following which, the character C is
shown (the button is concealed so use a
paper clip for example to press it in).
3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec-
onds. The number for the current magnetic
zone is displayed.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 67
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
68
4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the
number for the required magnetic zone ( 1
15) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic
zones for the compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C.
6. Following which, press and hold the button
in for 9 seconds and select L for left-hand
drive cars and R for right-hand drive.
7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum
speed of 10 km/h until a compass direction
is shown on the display, which indicates
that the calibration is complete.
G 02
01 50
Magnetic zones, Europe.
G 02
01 51
Magnetic zones, Asia.
G 02
01 52
Magnetic zones, South America.
G 02
01 53
Magnetic zones, Australia.
G 02
01 54
Magnetic zones, Africa.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 68
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69
Door mirrors
G 01
82 54
The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors
are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The
rearview mirrors can be operated in ignition
position I and II.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light on the button illumi-
nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
goes out.
Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in
ignition position I and II.
Retracting the mirrors 1. Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-
ically stop in the fully retracted position.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a scraper to remove ice from the mirrors as this could scratch the glass and the water and dirt-repellent coating* could be damaged. Use the defroster function instead, see page 82.
WARNING
Both door mirrors are the wide angled type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
Folding out the mirrors 1. Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-
ically stop in the fully extended position.
Automatic retracting/extending When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control or using the Keyless-system,
see page 118, the door mirrors are automati-
cally retracted/extended.
NOTE
The door mirrors will not be extended auto- matically during unlocking if they were retracted using the controls in the door.
If the car is locked with the remote control and is then started, the door mirrors will still be extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings Retract mirrors when
locking, see page 71 for a description of the
menu system.
Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset to the neutral
position for electric retracting and extending to
work.
1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir-
rors.
2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and R
button. The mirrors are now reset to the
neutral.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 69
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Rearview and door mirrors
02
70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Home safe and approach lighting The light* on the door mirrors illuminates when
the approach lighting or home safe lighting is
activated.
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS* BLIS is an information system that under cer-
tain conditions can help to draw the driver's
attention to vehicles moving in the same direc-
tion in the so-called "blind spot", see
page 151.
Storing door mirror positions The positions of the mirrors are stored when
the car is locked with the remote control. When
the car is unlocked with the same remote con-
trol the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the
stored positions.
Water and dirt-repellent coating* The front side windows and/or door
mirrors are treated with a coating
which improves the view in poor weather con-
ditions. For information on maintenance, see
page 192.
Rearview and door mirrors In certain weather conditions, the function of
the dirt-repellent coating is improved if the
door mirror defrosters are used, see
page 82.
Heat the door mirrors:
If they are covered with ice or snow.
In heavy rain and dirty road conditions.
If they are misted.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. The water and dirt-repel- lent coating could be damaged. Use the defroster to remove ice from the mirrors. An ice scraper could scratch the mirror glass!
A
D
B
C
E
G 02
63 07
Control panel.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 70
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71
Possible settings
Personal preferences can be set for some of
the car's functions. This applies to locks, cli-
mate control and audio functions. For audio
functions, see page 226.
Control panel Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
Use The settings are shown on the display (A).
Open the menu to enter settings:
1. Press MENU (B).
2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings with
the navigation button (E).
3. Press ENTER (D).
4. Select an alternative with the navigation
button (E).
5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.
Close the menu:
Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec-
ond.
Clock, adjustment
The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa-
rately.
1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow
up" or "arrow down" on the navigation but-
ton (E).
2. Select the number for adjustment using
"arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga-
tion button.
3. Press ENTER to start the clock.
NOTE
If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow down" after the final minute number has been adjusted.
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in
cars equipped with ECC:
Select from Low, Normal and High.
Recirculation timer When the timer is active, the air recirculates for
3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air
temperature.
Select On/Off depending on whether or
not you wish the recirculation timer to be
active.
Reset all Resets the climate function options to the fac-
tory settings.
Car settings
Retract mirrors when locking* When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control the door mirrors can be retrac-
ted/extended automatically. The On/Off options are available.
Reduced guard* The deadlocks function can be temporarily
deactivated and the alarm level reduced if
someone wishes to remain in the car and the
doors have to be locked from the outside. The
Activate once and Ask on exit options are
available, see pages 124 and 127.
Unlock confirm. light The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-
back when the car is unlocked with the remote
control. The On/Off options are available.
Lock confirm. light The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-
back when the car is locked with the remote
control. The On/Off options are available.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 71
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Doors auto lock When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the
doors and boot lid can be locked automatically.
The On/Off options are available. Pulling the
door handle twice unlocks and opens the
doors from the inside.
Doors unlock There are two alternatives for unlocking:
All doors one press of the remote control unlocks both doors and the boot lid.
Driver's door first, then all others one press of the remote control unlocks the driver's door. A second press then unlocks the passenger door and the boot lid.
Keyless entry*
All doors - both doors and the boot lid are
unlocked simultaneously 1.
Both front doors both front doors are unlocked simultaneously.
Either front door any door or the boot lid can be unlocked separately.
Simultaneous opening of all windows This function can be selected for the unlock
button on the remote control:
Auto. open all windows all windows are opened simultaneously with one long press on the unlock button.
Approach lighting Select the time the car's lights should remain
on when the approach lighting button is
pressed. The following alternatives are availa-
ble: 30/60/90 seconds.
Home safe lighting Select the time the car's lights should remain
on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled
back after the ignition key has been removed.
The following alternatives are available:
30/60/90 seconds.
Information
VIN number - (Vehicle Identification Num- ber) is the car's unique identity number.
Number of keys - The number of keys registered for the car is shown.
1 Both doors and the boot lid can also be locked simultaneously.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 72
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink EU*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73
General
G 03
00 70
HomeLink is a programmable remote control
which can control up to three different devices
(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-
ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so
replace their remote controls. HomeLink is
supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
HomeLink's panel consists of three program-
mable buttons and one indicator lamp.
NOTE
HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if the car is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. for purchasing a new car).
Erase the programming for the buttons when selling the car.
Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars equipped with HomeLink. This could have a negative effect on the HomeLink function.
Operation When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Press the programmed button to activate the
garage door, alarm system etc. The indicator
lamp illuminates for the time that the button is
kept depressed.
NOTE
In the event that the ignition is not activated, HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course be
used in parallel with HomeLink.
WARNING
If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.
Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information, ring the HomeLink Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of charge). They can also be contacted via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time The first step erases the memory in HomeLink
and must not be carried out when only one
individual button is being reprogrammed.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-
ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn
mode" and is ready to be programmed.
2. Position the original remote control 2-8 cm
from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator
lamp.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 73
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink EU*
02
74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button for the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flash-
ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button 1" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button, look in the man-
ufacturer's manual or call the HomeLink
Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of
charge). They can also be contacted via
the Internet: www.homelink.com
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink, while the "programming but-
ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual button, proceed in
accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on HomeLink
and do not release until step 3 has been
completed.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
position the original remote control 2-8 cm
from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator
lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote
control. The indicator lamp will start to
flash. When the flashing has changed over
from a slow to a rapid flashing - release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 74
evastarck
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink EU*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button 2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button, look in the man-
ufacturer's manual or call the HomeLink
Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of
charge). They can also be contacted via
the Internet: www.homelink.com
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink, while the "programming but-
ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Erasing programming It is only possible to erase the programming for
all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual
buttons.
Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds.
> HomeLink is now set in so-called "learn
mode" and is ready to be programmed
once more, see page 73.
2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 75
evastarck
G 02
09 06
76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control................................................... 78
Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 80
Air distribution......................................................................................... 84
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*..................................................... 85
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....................................................... 88
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 76
evastarck
03 CLIMATE CONTROL
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 77
evastarck
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
78
Air conditioning
The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment. The car is equipped with either
manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC,
Electronic Climate Control).
NOTE
The air conditioning system can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible air in the passenger compartment and pre- vent the windows from misting, it should always be on.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by first using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-
dows with a normal window cleaning agent.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the
windscreen).
Fault tracing and repair
Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate
control system to an authorised Volvo work-
shop only.
Refrigerant
The air conditioning system contains R134a
refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-
rine, which means that it is harmless to the
ozone layer. The system must only be charged
with R134a refrigerant. Have an authorised
Volvo workshop carry out this work.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart-
ment is only cleaned with one filter. This must
be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the
Volvo Service Programme for the recom-
mended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment,
it may be necessary to replace the filter more
often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Display
There is a display above the climate control
panel. This displays climate control settings.
Personal preferences
You can set preferences for two climate control
functions:
Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to cars with ECC).
Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air.
For information about these settings, see
page 71.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 78
evastarck
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
79
Air vents in the dashboard
G 01
99 42
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents towards the side windows
to remove misting from the front side windows.
During cold weather - Close the centre vents
for optimum comfort and best demisting.
ECC
Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects the side from which the sun is shining
into the passenger compartment. This means
that the temperature can differ between the
right and left-hand air vents despite the con-
trols being set for the same temperature on
both sides.
Sensor location
The sun sensor is on the top side of the dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is behind the climate control panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.
The humidity sensor is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-
isfactorily, close all side windows and the roof.
Acceleration The air conditioning system switches off tem-
porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a
temporary rise in temperature.
Condensation In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 79
evastarck
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Control panel
6
7
3
4
9
5
1 10
8
5
2
G 02
63 09
AUTO
Fan
Recirculation/Air quality system
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
Heated front right seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
Functions
1. AUTO The AUTO function automat-
ically regulates climate con-
trol and maintains the
selected temperature. The
AUTO function controls heat-
ing, air conditioning, fan
speed, recirculation, and air
distribution.
When the roof is open more air and heat/cold
is directed down in the passenger compart-
ment, and the output of the climate control is
limited if it is not possible to compensate for
the outside temperature
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled auto-
matically. All manual settings are switched off
when AUTO is switched on. The display shows
AUTO CLIMATE.
2. Fan Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 80
evastarck
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81
NOTE
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan and the air conditioning are switched off. The display shows the fan symbol and OFF.
3. Recirculation The function is selected to
shut out bad air, exhaust
gases etc. from the passen-
ger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is recirculated, i.e. no outside
air is taken into the car when
this function is activated. If the air in the car
recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist-
ing on the insides of the windows.
Timer The timer function reduces the risk of icing,
misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).
To activate/deactivate the function see
page 71.
NOTE
When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
3. Air quality system (option) (same button as recirculation)
The air quality system con-
sists of a multi-filter and a
sensor. The filter separates
gases and particles to reduce
the levels of odours and pol-
lution in the passenger compartment. When
the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air
intakes are closed and the air in the passenger
compartment is recirculated. A green light (A)
illuminates in the button when the air quality
sensor is active.
G 00
00 00
Activating the air quality sensor:
Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality
sensor (normal setting).
Or:
Switch between three functions by press-
ing repeatedly the recirculation button.
Air quality sensor engaged the light (A) illuminates.
No recirculation engaged, provided it is not required for cooling in hot weather light not illuminated.
Recirculation engaged the light (M) illu- minates.
Keep the following in mind:
As a rule, the air quality sensor should always be engaged.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.
The defroster functions for the front, side and rear windows can be used to demist the windows.
4. Defroster Used to quickly remove mist-
ing and ice from the wind-
screen and side windows. Air
flows to the windows at high
fan speed. The light in the
defroster button illuminates
when the function is active.
The following also takes place when the
defroster function is activated in order to pro-
vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-
ger compartment:
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button (6)
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 81
evastarck
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5. Air distribution The airflow can be distributed
to the windows, dashboard
vents or floor by pressing the
air distribution buttons.
A symbol on the display
above the climate control
panel and an illuminated light in the relevant
button indicate which function has been
selected.
Refer to the table on page 84.
6. AC On/Off (ON/OFF) ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: Off
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the AC button).
NOTE
The climate control system's demisting function with humidity sensor is significantly reduced with the air conditioning in deacti- vated mode (OFF), as well as with manually selected air distribution and fan speed.
7 and 8. Heated front seats* To activate front seat heating:
Higher heat:
Press the button once both lights illumi-
nate.
Lower heat:
Press the button once one light illumi-
nates.
Heat off:
Press the button three times light not illu-
minated.
9. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mir-
rors. Press the button once to
start simultaneous rear win-
dow and rearview mirror
defrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or auto-
matically. Switch off manually with one press
on the button. Automatic switching off discon-
nects the rear window and door mirrors after
12 20 minutes depending on outside tem-
perature.
During cold weather the defrosting 1 also con-
tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear
window and door mirrors free of ice and mist.
The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted
to the outside temperature. This function must
be switched off manually.
1 Depending on market
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 82
evastarck
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83
10. Temperature selector The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
Press the button once to acti-
vate one side only. Press
again to activate the other
side. Press the button a third time to activate
both sides.
The active side is indicated by the button's light
and in the display above the climate control
panel.
When the car is started, the most recent setting
is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 83
evastarck
03 Climate control
Air distribution
03
84
Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents. The
air is not recirculated. Air
conditioning is always
engaged.
To remove ice and
misting quickly.
Air to the floor and windows.
Some air flows from the dash-
board air vents.
To ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
To prevent misting
and icing in a cold and
humid climate. (Not
for low fan speed.)
Air to floor and from dash-
board air vents.
In sunny weather with
cool outside tempera-
tures.
Airflow to windows and from
dashboard air vents.
To ensure good com-
fort in warm, dry
weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows to
the dashboard air vents and
windows.
To warm the feet.
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
To ensure efficient
cooling in warm
weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and to
the floor.
To provide cooler air
for the feet or warmer
air to the upper body in
cold weather or hot,
dry weather.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 84
evastarck
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85
General information about heaters
The parking heater heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-
tem calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
The heater is cannot start if the outside tem-
perature exceeds 25 C. At 10 C or lower the
maximum running time of the parking heater is
50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the petrol or diesel heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.
Refuelling
G 00
76 32
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.
Check on the information display that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows PARK HEAT ON.
Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater is switched
off automatically and a message appears on
the information display.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the
indicator stalk READ button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 85
evastarck
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating the heater
G 02
90 52
READ button
Thumbwheel 1
RESETbutton1
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
DIRECT START is activated, the
information symbol in the com-
bined instrument panel illuminates
and the information display shows
an explanatory text.
Display Specification
FUEL HEATER ON The heater is
switched on and
running.
TIMER IS SET FOR
FUEL HEATER
Reminder that the
heater will start at
the set time after the
car has been left,
when the ignition
key is removed from
the ignition switch.
Display Specification
HEATER STOP-
PED - LOW BAT-
TERY
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine.
HEATER STOP-
PED LOW FUEL
LEVEL
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine as well as
50 km driving.
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT
START.
2. Press the RESET button to select between
ON and OFF.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or
with programmed timer.
OFF: Parking heater switched off.
With the direct start of the heater it will be acti-
vated for 50 minutes.
1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 86
evastarck
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK
HEAT TIMER 1.
2. Briefly press the RESET button so that the
hours setting starts to flash.
3. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting TIMER 1 a second start time can
be programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling with
the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
TIMER 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Press the READ button.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT
TIMER 2.
The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
The text OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop".
Clock/timer The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 87
evastarck
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)
03
88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Auxiliary heater (diesel)
In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may
be required for achieving the correct tempera-
ture in the passenger compartment during cold
weather.
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on or off manually but is only controlled by the car's electronics.
When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 88
evastarck
03 Climate control
03
89
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 89
evastarck
G 02
09 08
90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Front seats.............................................................................................. 92
Electrically operated roof ....................................................................... 95
Wind deflector*........................................................................................ 99
Interior lighting...................................................................................... 100
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment................................... 102
Cargo area............................................................................................ 106
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 90
evastarck
04 INTERIOR
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 91
evastarck
04 Interior
Front seats
04
92
Seating position
G 02
01 97
The driver's and passenger seats can be
adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving
positions
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Lumbar support 1, turn the wheel.
Backrest rake: turn the wheel.
Control panel for power seat*.
Lever (2) is not available on all seat models.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat and adjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before set- ting off, never while driving.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
NOTE
When putting on the seatbelt it is easiest to pick it up from down at the seatbelt guide, not over the shoulder.
Entry to the rear seat
G 02
01 98
Handle for boarding
Button for boarding
Mechanical seat Move the seat forward:
1. Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt
guide, see page 18.
2. Pull up the handle (1), hold it steady while
tipping the backrest forward into locked
position.
3. Push the seat forward.
1 Also applies to power seat.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 92
evastarck
04 Interior
Front seats
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93
Move the seat backward:
1. Push the seat back until it reaches its orig-
inal position.
2. Pull up the handle (1), hold it steady while
tipping the backrest back.
3. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.
Power seat* Move the seat forward:
1. Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt
guide, see page 18.
2. Pull up the handle (1), hold it steady while
tipping the backrest forward into locked
position.
3. Hold the button (2) depressed while the
seat moves forward.
Move the seat backward:
1. Hold the button (2) depressed until the seat
reaches its original position.
2. Pull up the handle (1), hold it steady while
tipping the backrest back.
3. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.
NOTE
The seat can only be moved to the very front (+6 cm) to facilitate entry and exit to and from the rear seat when the backrest has been folded forward. If the backrest is folded back when the seat is in the front position then the seat automatically moves back approx. 6 cm after a few seconds.
WARNING
Check that the backrest is properly folded back by pushing and pulling the head restraint.
The belt on the front passenger side must be
in the belt guide during driving, even when
there is no passenger sitting in the seat.
Floor mats*
Volvo supplies floor carpets which are espe-
cially produced for your car.
WARNING
The floor mat at the driver's seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.
Power seat*
G 02
01 99
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol without the key being inserted into the igni-
tion switch. The seat can always be adjusted in
ignition position I or II.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat, forwards/backwards
Seat, up/down
Backrest rake
An overload protection is deployed if one of the
seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the
ignition and wait a short time before adjusting
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 93
evastarck
04 Interior
Front seats
04
94
the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings
can be adjusted at a time.
Memory function
G 02
02 00
Buttons for memory function.
Store setting 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Press and hold button M while pressing
button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.
Using a stored setting Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the
seat and the door mirrors stop. If you release
the button then the movement of the seat will
stop.
Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
any of the buttons to stop the function.
WARNING
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls.
Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment.
Ensure that none of the rear seat passen- gers is in danger of becoming trapped.
Memory in the remote control The positions of the driver's seat and the door
mirrors are stored in the memory for the remote
control with which the car is locked. When the
car is unlocked with the same remote control
the driver's seat and the door mirrors adopt the
stored positions when the driver's door is
opened.
NOTE
Remote control memory is independent of seat memory.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 94
evastarck
04 Interior
Electrically operated roof
04
95
Conditions for roof operation
No objects on the parcel shelf.
No ice, snow or loose objects on the roof or boot lid.
Dry roof.
2.0 m clearance upward (A) and 0.2 m between bumper and objects behind (B).
Ambient temperature 10 C or warmer.
Closed cargo separator, see page 106.
Closed boot lid.
Stationary car, brake pedal depressed.
If the instructions on the following pages are
not followed then this could cause damage to
the roof's opening and closing mechanisms.
Volvo also recommends that the following is
observed:
Level ground.
Execution of roof operation in one single movement.
Engine at idling speed.
A
B
G 02
08 00
IMPORTANT
Water collecting on the roof can run down into the cargo area and the passenger com- partment if the roof is opened.
WARNING
People, children or objects can be trapped by the roof or boot lid's moving parts.
Operate the roof with caution.
See decal on the cargo separator.
Do not allow children to play with the controls.
Do not leave the roof in a stationary position for longer than necessary.
WARNING
Never leave the car key in the car if there are children left in the car.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 95
evastarck
04 Interior
Electrically operated roof
04
96
Hatch cover
G 02
08 01
When the roof is open there is a hatch cover
between the head restraints in the rear seat and
the boot lid, see the preceding illustration.
IMPORTANT
Do not sit on the hatch cover or use it as a support as it could be damaged.
Opening and closing the roof
G 01
83 51
Close the roof
Open the roof
1. Turn the ignition key to position II. Prefera-
bly starting the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Keep the left-hand button (1) pressed in to
close, or the right-hand button (2) to open.
Pay attention to any messages on the informa-
tion display while the roof is in motion. The
windows that are closed are opened
approx. 10 centimetres. All windows are closed
when the movement of the roof is completed.
Release the button when a signal sounds and
the message ROOF CLOSED or ROOF
OPEN is shown on the information display.
WARNING
Never pull the release wire for the hydraulic system that is located under the rear seat cushion. Only service personnel are allowed to use the hydraulic system's emergency release function.
Consequences:
significant risk of crushing injury
uncontrolled movement/opening of the electrically operated roof or boot lid
the roof components could be destroyed.
Make thoroughly sure that the conditions are fulfilled before operating the roof.
Text on the information display A number of these messages also apply to
loading assistance, see page 106.
PRESS BRAKE FOR ROOF OPERATION - Depress the brake pedal in order to operate the roof.
CLOSE BOOT FOR ROOF OPERATION - The boot lid is not closed. Close the boot lid.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 96
evastarck
04 Interior
Electrically operated roof
04
97
OPEN BOOT LID FULLY - Open boot lid fully.
CLOSE BOOT SEP. FOR ROOF OPERAT. - The cargo separator is not closed. Close the cargo separator, see page 106.
LOW BATTERY FOR ROOF OPERATION - The battery voltage is too low. The roof can only be closed. Charge the battery, e.g. by starting the engine, and try again.
ROOF NOT LOCKED - The roof has not been opened or closed properly. Try again to open or close the roof.
ROOF IN LOAD AID POSITION - The roof has been raised with the loading assis- tance function. Lower the roof, see page 106.
TEMP LIMITS ROOF OPERATION - The roof system is either overheated or the out- side temperature is below 10 C. If the roof is overheated, wait approx. five minutes until the message clears and try again.
Messages with roof faults Two messages can be shown on the informa-
tion display in the event of a roof fault:
ROOF FAILURE SERVICE REQUIRED - The roof cannot be operated. This requires service by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Covering over can be performed in accord- ance with the instructions.
ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL - The roof or loading assistance must be operated in accordance with special instructions. Service must be performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.
Special instructions for manoeuvring in
the event of a roof fault If the message ROOF FAILURE SEE
MANUAL is shown on the information display
then the roof cannot be operated normally.
NOTE
After the roof has been closed it cannot be opened again.
IMPORTANT
Closing in the event of a roof fault requires very careful checking of the conditions for operating the roof, see page 95. Even if the conditions are fulfilled, there is a significant risk of material damage.
1. Keep the closing button pressed in until
ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL is shown
on the display. Following which, release
the button.
2. Press the closing button again. Press the
closing button again. Keep it pressed in for
at least 30 seconds until the roof and boot
lid are closed. Pay attention for any faults
that could cause damage to the car.
A signal sounds during the whole closing oper-
ation.
WARNING
Never pull the release wire for the hydraulic system that is located under the rear seat cushion. Only service personnel are allowed to use the hydraulic system's emergency release function.
Consequences:
significant risk of crushing injury
uncontrolled movement/opening of the electrically operated roof or boot lid
the roof components could be destroyed.
Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer- ence in the roof system could cause mal- function and serious injury as a result.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 97
evastarck
04 Interior
Electrically operated roof
04
98
Plastic cover for temporary covering
G 02
08 02
Clamping of the plastic cover between the
wiper blades and the windscreen
Hook at front wheel housing
Hole in plastic cover for rearview mirror
Hook at rear wheel housing
Hole in plastic cover for antenna
Hooks at rear bumper
If the roof cannot be closed due to low battery
voltage or a possible roof fault then a protective
plastic cover can be fitted. The plastic cover is
fitted with the rope attachments inward.
The plastic cover is stored in a bag marked
"Cover for temporary use".
G 02
08 03
Plastic cover, located in the ski hatch.
1. Raise the windows (if possible).
2. Take the plastic cover from the centre
panel in the rear seat backrest at the ski
hatch.
3. Take the plastic cover from the package
and unwrap it.
4. Thread the hole (3) over the door mirror and
secure the hooks (2) in the front wheel
arches.
5. Clamp the plastic cover between the wiper
blades and the windscreen and stretch the
plastic so that it has one tuck (1) per wiper
blade.
6. Guide through the antenna (5).
7. Secure the hooks (4) in the rear wheel
arches and the hooks (6) under the rear
bumper.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 98
evastarck
04 Interior
Wind deflector*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99
General
G 02
08 04
The wind deflector can be used when driving
with a lowered roof to reduce the swirling air-
flow and draughts in the passenger compart-
ment.
Installing the wind deflector 1. Fold out the four-part deflector to is full size
and press the catch together.
2. Insert the wind deflector's supports under
the head restraints so that they are resting
against the top edge of the backrest.
3. Press the locking levers into the holders on
the side panels until a click is heard.
4. Open out the wind deflector.
NOTE
Be careful of the car's upholstery.
The zips in the wind deflector are used for stor-
ing/retrieving luggage on the rear seat.
WARNING
Check that the wind deflector is secured firmly. Otherwise it may detach in the event of sudden movement for example and then cause injury and damage.
WARNING
No passengers are allowed in the rear seat when the wind deflector is fitted.
The deflector is stored in the cargo area in its
bag, under the cargo separator, furthest for-
ward against the backrest.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 99
evastarck
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading lamps and interior lighting
G 02
08 05
Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off
Interior lighting
Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on in ignition position I and II as
well as when the engine is running. The lighting
can also be activated within 30 minutes after:
the engine has been switched off and the ignition is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.
Roof lighting The reading lamps are switched on or off by
pressing the relevant button in the roof con-
sole.
Rear seat lighting
G 02
08 06
Switched on or off with one press of the button.
Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-
ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-
tively when a side door is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror*
G 02
02 10
The lamp is automatically switched on and off
respectively when the cover is opened or
closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 100
evastarck
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
101
Automatic lighting
Using the switch (2), see page 100, three posi-
tions can be selected for the lighting the pas-
senger compartment:
Off right-hand side (marked with 0) depressed, automatic lighting switched off.
Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated. The dimmer function is active.
On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.
Neutral position When the switch (2) is in neutral position pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
below.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
the car is unlocked with the key or remote control
the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
the engine is started.
the car is locked with the key or remote control.
Passenger compartment lighting comes on
and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors
is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off auto-
matically after 5 minutes.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 101
evastarck
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
102
Storage spaces
6
1 2 3 4 5
9
10
7
8
G 01
95 14
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 102
evastarck
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103
Storage compartment in door panel (lock-
able*).
Coat hanger, only for light garments.
Storage pocket on front edge of front seat
cushions.
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Cup holder (with roller cover*)
Tunnel compartment (e.g. for CDs)
Cup holder (with roller cover*)
Storage compartment in rear side panel
Storage pocket on rear of front seats.
WARNING
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that they could cause injury during heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Glovebox
G 02
42 08
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
coins, pens and fuel cards.
The glovebox can be locked with the remote
control's detachable key blade. Further infor-
mation is available on page 113.
Coat hanger
G 01
81 37
The coat hanger is located on the passenger
seat head restraint. Only hang light garments
on the hanger.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 103
evastarck
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Storage compartment in door panel
G 03
04 07
The storage compartment is opened by lifting
the lower front edge of the lid, and closed with
a touch on its upper section.
Lockable storage compartment in door
panel* The storage compartment is locked with the
remote control, see page 115.
Storage compartment in rear side panel
G 02
08 07
The storage compartment is opened and
closed with a touch in the centre of its upper
section.
Storage under the front armrest
G 01
83 71
There is a storage space under the armrest.
There is also a smaller storage space in the
detachable armrest. Press the small button
and lift the armrest to open the shallow com-
partment. Press the large button and lift the
armrest to open the deeper compartment.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 104
evastarck
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105
G 02
67 04
In the deeper compartment there is space for
10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored
vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have
space.
Cup holder in centre console
G 01
83 72
There is space for a double cup holder under
the roller cover. The space can be used for
storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the
rear edge of the cup holder where there is a
recess.
If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its
two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front
edge of the space and then press down the
rear edge of the cup holder.
The cup holder cannot be lifted out from cars
which have alarm with movement detector*.
Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge
from below and pulling forward.
Storage compartment behind the handbrake
G 01
96 24
When there are no buttons for parking assis-
tance and BLIS, see page 149 and page
152, the space can be used as a storage com-
partment.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 105
evastarck
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
106
Cargo separator
G 02
08 45
The purpose of the separator is to limit the
amount of the load in the cargo area so that the
movement of the roof is not disrupted. Be sure
to close the cargo separator fully so that it is
locked on both the left and right-hand sides.
IMPORTANT
Do not place objects above or alongside the cargo separator when it is closed. Do not position luggage so that it is higher that the closed cargo separator.
G 02
08 47
Label on cargo separator.
NOTE
Too much load in the cargo area prevents the cargo separator from being closed. Consequently the roof is also prevented from opening.
Loading assistance
G 02
08 48
Button for raising and lowering the roof.
In open position the roof is folded up in the
cargo area. The roof can be raised or lowered
to facilitate loading and unloading using the
button (see preceding illustration). The move-
ments for loading assistance constitute a small
amount of the normal movement of the roof.
Consequently the messages for roof operation
on the information display also apply to loading
assistance, see page 96.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 106
evastarck
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
107
WARNING
People or objects which prevent the raising and lowering of the roof are at risk of being trapped.
Using loading assistance One press on the button both starts and stops
raising/lowering. It may take several seconds
before the movement starts. If a signal sounds
when the button is pressed and the roof does
not move, read the message on the information
display.
1. Press the button to raise the roof.
2. Lift the cargo separator and move it into
the cargo area.
3. When loading is complete, fold down the
cargo separator.
4. Press the button so that the roof is low-
ered.
NOTE
If the battery level is too low then the roof can only be lowered.
Using loading assistance with roof faults If the message ROOF FAILURE SEE
MANUAL is shown on the information display
then the roof can only be lowered.
1. Check that ROOF FAILURE SEE
MANUAL is shown on the display.
2. Keep the button depressed for approx.
5 seconds. Keep the button depressed
while the roof is lowered.
A signal sounds during the whole lowering
operation.
IMPORTANT
The cargo separator should be fully open before opening the roof.
When the roof is raised for loading assis- tance or if the movement is interrupted by pressing in the button twice then the boot lid must not be closed. This could result in damage and malfunction in the system.
Lower the roof to its lowest position, wait a few seconds and then close the boot lid.
Load retaining eyelets
G 02
08 50
There are four or more eyelets for securing
straps or ropes. Straps that are suitable for the
eyelets are supplied by Volvo dealers.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 107
evastarck
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Electrical socket in cargo area
G 02
08 56
Fold down the cover to access the electrical
socket. This socket works regardless of
whether or not the ignition is on.
NOTE
Do not use the electric socket with the engine switched off as there is a risk of the battery becoming discharged.
Ski hatch
G 02
10 37
There is a hatch behind the centre panel 1 in the
rear seat backrest for transporting long, light
objects.
Max. length: 2 m and max. weight: 25 kg. The
ski hatch is opened from two directions, from
the centre panel and from inside the cargo
area.
Open the centre section in the back of
the rear seat Pull the strap in the top of the backrest
centre section to access the hatch.
Close the centre section in the back of
the rear seat 1. Refit the centre section with the lower part
first.
2. Fold in the centre section and press until a
clicking sound is heard.
Hatch in cargo area If the car is equipped with ski bag* then the zip
in the bag must also be opened from the pas-
senger compartment.
Press the buttons in the two holes in the
hatch towards each other and open the
hatch.
Locking the ski hatch Locked with the remote control, see
page 117.
Secure long loads with the seatbelt Long loads, for example skis, must be secured
with the rear seat's seatbelt.
Wrap the seatbelt one turn around the skis
and lock it in the normal way in the seatbelt
buckle.
If the car is equipped with a ski bag then the
belt must be threaded through its handle.
1 Emergency puncture repair kit, first aid, plastic cover and towing eye are stored in the centre panel in the rear seat backrest. For cars with spare wheel*, see page 180.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 108
evastarck
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
109
WARNING
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg. Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may other- wise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 109
evastarck
110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control with key blade............................................................. 112
Privacy locking*..................................................................................... 115
Active locks........................................................................................... 117
Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 118
Battery in remote control...................................................................... 121
Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 122
Alarm*.................................................................................................... 126
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 110
evastarck
05 LOCKS AND ALARM
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 111
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control with key blade
05
112
Remote control
The car is supplied with two remote controls.
They also serve as ignition keys.
The remote controls contain detachable metal
key blades for mechanical locking/unlocking of
the driver's door and glovebox.
The key blades' unique code is available at
authorised Volvo workshops, who can order
new key blades.
A maximum of six remote controls/key blades
can be programmed and used for one single
car.
Turn signal indication during locking/ unlocking
When the car is unlocked using the Keyless
Drive system or the remote control, two short
flashes of the direction indicators serve to indi-
cate that unlocking was correctly performed.
For locking, the indication takes place with one
long flash and only if all locks have been
locked, after the doors and the boot lid have
been closed.
Personal preferences can be used to deacti-
vate indication via the direction indicators.
There will then be no visual indication as to
whether the lock status is correct, see
page 71.
Loss of a remote control
If you lose a remote control, take the car and
the other remote controls to an authorised
Volvo workshop. The code of the missing
remote control must be erased from the sys-
tem as a theft prevention measure.
Immobiliser
The remote controls are fitted with coded
chips. The code must be accepted by the
reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The car
can only be started if the correct remote control
with the correct code is used.
Remote control functions
G 01
94 02
Locking Locks the doors, the boot lid,
the storage compartments in the door pan-
els (lockable as option) as well as the ski
hatch. The remote control does not lock
the glovebox.
Unlocking Unlocks the doors, the boot
lid, the storage compartments in the door
panels (lockable as option) as well as the
ski hatch. The remote control does not
unlock the glovebox. Press and hold to
open the side windows.
Approach lighting Switches on the light-
ing at a distance and lights up the area
around a car parked in a dark location.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 112
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control with key blade
05
113
Press the button once to switch on the
interior lighting, position/parking lamps,
number plate lighting and door mirror
lamps (option). The lighting is switched off
automatically after 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
For information on setting the delay time,
see page 71.
Boot lid - Press the button once to unlock
the boot lid only. 1
Panic function Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the red
button for at least three seconds or press
it twice within three seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn. The func-
tion can be turned off with the same button
once it has been active for at least 5 sec-
onds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after 30 seconds.
IMPORTANT
The narrow section of the remote control is particularly sensitive - this contains the chip. The car cannot be started if the chip is dam- aged.
Detachable key blade
G 01
94 03
Using the remote control's detachable key
blade:
the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking is not activated with the remote control - see the next section and see page 118.
the boot lid can be opened manually if cen- tral locking is not activated with the remote control, see page 114 and see page 115.
access to the glovebox and cargo area (privacy locking) is blocked, see page 115.
Removing the key blade To remove the key blade from the remote con-
trol:
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
Pull out the key blade at the same time.
Inserting the key blade Be careful when inserting the key blade into the
remote control.
1. Hold the remote control with the narrow
end pointing down and lower the key blade
into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in
position. You should hear a "click".
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged, then the driver's door can be
unlocked and opened as follows:
1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door
keyhole.
2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and
open the door.
1 The function unlocks the boot lid it does not open.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 113
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control with key blade
05
114
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is deactivated by inserting the remote control in the ignition switch. see page 127.
Locking the glovebox
G 02
00 34
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control's detachable key
blade. (For information on removing the key
blade, see page 113.)
For information on privacy locking, see
page 115
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlocking takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
The remote control cannot unlock the glo- vebox without the key blade.
This function is particularly useful for when the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 114
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115
G 01
94 16
Central locking's normal active locks with
the remote control.
Active locks for remote control with key
blade removed and with activated privacy
locking.
The privacy locking function is intended for
when the car is left for service, with a hotel
parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then
locked and the boot lid and storage compart-
ment (option) locks are disconnected from the
central locking. The cargo area cannot be
opened with either the central locking button in
the front doors or the remote control.
This means that the remote control without key
blade can only be used to activate/deactivate
the alarm, to open the doors (A) and to drive
the car (B).
The remote control key is handed over without
the removable key blade which the owner then
keeps.
Activating privacy locking
NOTE
When opening/closing the folding roof there is the option to temporarily access the con- tents in the cargo area.
The folding roof must be closed.
NOTE
The information display will show CLOSE BOOT SEP. FOR ROOF OPERAT.
1. Open the boot lid and fold up the cargo
separator; at which operation of the folding
roof is blocked, see page 112.
2. Close the boot lid.
3. Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote control, see page 113.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 115
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
05
116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 02
00 32
4. Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
and turn the key blade 180 degrees clock-
wise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked
position for privacy locking.
5. Pull out the key blade.
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control but keep it in a safe place instead.
Following which, the glovebox is locked and
the lockable storage compartments behind the
door panels (D), the ski hatch (E) and the boot
lid (F) can no longer be unlocked with the
remote control.
Deactivating privacy locking In order to reconnect the lockable storage
compartments to the central locking's auto-
matic system, proceed as follows:
1. Insert the remote control's detachable key
blade into the glovebox keyhole and turn
180 degrees anticlockwise.
2. Refit the key blade into the remote control,
see page 113.
Following which, the glovebox is unlocked and
all central locking functions are controlled by
the remote control again.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 116
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Active locks
05
117
G 01
94 15
Active locks for remote control.
Doors
Steering lock
Ski hatch
Boot lid
Active locks for remote control with locka-
ble storage compartments.
Doors
Steering lock
Storage compartments in door panels
Ski hatch
Boot lid
For descriptions of the different storage areas,
see page 102.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 117
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless lock and ignition system
G 01
94 18
The keyless drive system allows the car to be
unlocked, driven and locked without the need
for a key. You simply need to have the remote
control with you in a pocket or a bag.
The system makes it easier and more conven-
ient to open the car, for example with shopping
bags in one hand and a child in the other. It
saves you having to take out or look for the
remote control.
The two remote controls incorporate the key-
less drive function. You can order additional
remote controls. The keyless drive system can
handle up to six remote controls.
Remote control max. 1.5 m from the car In order to open a door or the boot lid, a remote
control must be no more than approx. 1.5 m
from the car door handle or boot lid.
This means that the person who wishes to
open a door must have the remote control with
him or her. It is not possible to open a door if
the remote control is on the other side of the
car.
The grey area in the illustration indicates the
range covered by the system's antennas.
If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless
drive remote control with them, a warning mes-
sage appears on the information display and a
reminder signal sounds. The warning message
disappears when the remote control is brought
back to the car or when the ignition dial is
turned to position 0. The warning is only issued
if the ignition dial is in position I or II after
someone has opened and closed a door.
The warning message and reminder signal dis-
appear when the remote control is brought
back to the car after one of the following
actions:
a door has been opened and closed
the ignition dial has been turned to position 0
the READ button has been pressed.
Never leave any remote control in the car If a remote control with keyless drive function
is left in the car, it is made passive when the
car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
If someone breaks into the car and finds the
remote control, it can be activated and used
again. It is therefore important to handle all
remote controls with equal care.
Interference to remote control function Electromagnetic screening and fields can inter-
fere with the keyless drive system. To avoid
this: do not place the remote control near
mobile phones, metallic objects or, for exam-
ple, in a metal briefcase.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the remote control and key blade in the normal
way, see page 112.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 118
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119
Locking
G 02
00 33
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles.
When the remote control is within the range
covered by the system's antennas, the doors
and the boot lid are locked as follows:
Push in the lock button on one of the door
handles.
All doors must be closed before the lock button
is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.
When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the
inside of the doors retract.
An LED on the inside of the door in question
illuminates, see page 123.
NOTE
On cars with the keyless drive system and automatic transmission the gear selector must be moved to the P position and the ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other- wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.
Unlocking
When the remote control is within the range
covered by the system's antennas:
1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant han-
dle.
2. Open the boot lid by pressing under the
boot lid opening button and lift the boot lid.
If for some reason the keyless drive function in
the remote control is not operating, the car can
be unlocked using the remote control func-
tions, see page 112.
Power seat remote control with
memory function If several people with keyless drive remote
controls get into the car, then the driver's seat
will be adjusted for the person who opens the
door first.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
G 02
02 25
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged, then the driver's door can be opened
as follows:
1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out
the plastic cover in the handle by inserting
the key blade in the hole on the bottom of
the cover.
2. Unlock the door using the key blade.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 119
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is deactivated by inserting the remote control in the ignition switch. see page 127.
Antenna location
G 02
00 77
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, inside centre
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, left
Centre console, under the rear section
Door handle, right
Centre console, under the front section
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
Personal preferences
The Keyless Drive system can have personal
preferences applied, see page 71.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 120
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Battery in remote control
05
121
Weak remote control battery
When the battery runs down and full function-
ality cannot be guaranteed, the information
symbol and KEY BATTERY LOW
VOLTAGE or CAR KEY - CHANGE
BATTERY appear on the display.
Replacing the remote control battery
G 01
94 06
If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals
from the remote control at a normal distance,
the battery should be replaced
(type CR 2450, 3 V).
1. Place the remote control with the keypad
downward and prize up the cover using a
small screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and
() sides are fitted (there is a diagram under
the cover).
4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid
touching the battery and its terminals with
your fingers.
5. Refit the cover and press it in.
Dispose of the old battery in an environmen-
tally-responsible manner.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 121
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Locking/unlocking the car from outside
For cars with the Keyless system, see
page 118.
Unlocking The remote control unlock button can unlock
the car in two different ways (select in personal
preferences, see page 71):
one press unlocks the doors and the boot lid
one press unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the boot lid.
Locking The remote control locks the doors and the
tailgate simultaneously. Door lock buttons and
inside door handles are disengaged*.
The fuel filler flap cannot be opened if the car
is locked with the remote control.
NOTE
The car can be locked even if a door or the boot lid is open*. When the door is closed there is a risk that the keys will be locked in.
WARNING
Be aware that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the outside with the remote control. You cannot then leave the car using any of the controls inside the car.
Global opening
One long press on the unlock or lock button
opens or closes all windows simultaneously
(also closes the sunroof).
The function can be used to quickly air the car
in hot weather for example.
Different personal settings can be made, see
page 71.
Boot lid
Unlocking Unlocking boot lid only:
Press the boot lid unlock button on the
remote control.
Locking If the doors are locked when the boot lid is
closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the
remote control or from inside to lock both
doors and the boot lid.
Opening the boot lid mechanically
G 01
63 34
If the car's electrical systems are temporarily
out of order then the boot lid can be opened
mechanically with the remote control's detach-
able key blade. For information on removing
the key blade, see page 113.
1. Fold forward the left-hand seat's backrest to access the keyhole down at the floor.
2. Fold up the tab that covers the keyhole.
3. Insert the key blade and turn it 110 degrees clockwise.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 122
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
123
IMPORTANT
The roof must be fully closed or fully open before mechanical opening can be used for the boot lid.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically (does not apply to locking
from inside). This function prevents the car
from being left unlocked unintentionally. For
cars with alarms, see page 127.
Locking/unlocking the car from inside
G 02
08 65
The doors and the boot lid can be locked or
unlocked simultaneously using the lock button
by the door handle.
Unlocking Press the upper section of the lock button.
The door cannot be unlocked by pulling up the
lock button.
Locking Press the lower section of the lock button.
Opening the doors When the doors are locked from the inside:
Pull the handle twice to unlock and open
the doors.
Lock indicator
G 02
08 67
A light on the inside of the door in question illu-
minates for approx. five minutes after the car
has been locked with the remote control, or
with the Keyless drive system when the engine
is switched off, see page 118.
When the car is locked from the inside the
LEDs acknowledge the locking with one long
flash. Unlocking from the inside is acknowl-
edged by two short flashes.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 123
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic locking
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the
doors and boot lid can be locked automatically.
When the function is activated and the doors
have been locked they can be opened in two
ways:
pull one of the door handles twice
press the unlock button by the door han- dle.
The function can be activated/deactivated by
means of personal preferences, see page 71.
Deadlocks
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be
opened from the inside if they are locked with
the remote control.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control and are set after a 25 second delay after
the doors have been locked.
The car can only be unlocked from the dead-
lock mode with the remote control. The driver's
door can also be unlocked with the detachable
key blade.
Temporary deactivation
A
D
B
C
E
G 02
63 07
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off.
This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 71).
2. Select Reduced guard.
3. Select Activate once: The instrument
panel display shows the message
Reduced guard - See manual and the
deadlocks function is switched off when
the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is
turned to position 0 the audio system dis-
play shows the message Press ENTER to
reduce guard until engine is started.
EXIT to cancel - select one of the options:
If the deadlocks function shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car.
If the car is equipped with an alarm with move-
ment and tilt detectors* then these are
switched off at the same time, see page 127.
The next time the key is turned to position II the
system is reset to zero and the instrument
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 124
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125
panel display shows the message Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the
alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are re-
engaged.
or
If the locking system shall not be changed: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with an alarm:
Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 125
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alarm system
When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-
tors all alarm inputs.
The alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or boot lid is opened
a non-approved key is used in the ignition or if an attempt is made to force the lock.
a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector).
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector).
a battery cable is disconnected.
anyone tries to disconnect the siren.
NOTE
When the roof is closed, the alarm functions in the same way as when it is open, i.e. movement detected in the passenger com- partment triggers an alarm.
Alarm indicator
G 02
02 27
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
LED not lit the alarm is not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed.
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until the ignition is switched on the alarm has been triggered.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message
appears on the display. Contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.
Arming the alarm
Press the lock button on the remote con-
trol. A long flash from the car's direction
indicators confirms that the alarm is armed
and that the doors are locked.
IMPORTANT
The alarm is fully armed when the car's direction indicators have made one long flash and the LED on the instrument panel flashes once every other second.
Disarming the alarm
Press the unlock button on the remote
control. Two short flashes from the car's
direction indicators confirm that the alarm
is disarmed and that the doors are
unlocked.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 126
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents you accidentally leaving
the car without the alarm on.
If none of the doors or the tailgate are opened
within two minutes of disarming the alarm (and
the car has been unlocked with the remote
control), the alarm is automatically rearmed.
The car is locked at the same time.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Press the unlock button on the remote
control or insert the key in the ignition
switch.
Confirmation is given by two short flashes from
the direction indicators.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-
pens:
A siren sounds for less than 25 seconds. The siren has its own battery which is used if the car battery has insufficient charge or is disconnected.
The direction indicators flash for five minutes or until the alarm is deactivated.
Remote control not working
G 01
94 20
If for some reason the remote control is not
working, the alarm can still be switched off and
the car started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.
The alarm is triggered and the siren
sounds.
2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First
remove the knob by pressing in the
catch (1) and pulling out (2).
3. Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The
alarm light flashes rapidly until the ignition
key is turned to position II.
Reduced alarm level
A
D
B
C
E
G 02
63 07
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 127
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm -
for example when leaving a dog in the car or
during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt
detectors can be temporarily switched off.
This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under CAR
SETTINGS (for a detailed description of
the menu system, see page 71).
2. Select REDUCED GUARD.
3. Select Activate once: The instrument
panel display shows the message
Reduced guard - See manual and the
movement and tilt detectors are switched
off when the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is
turned to position 0 the audio system dis-
play shows the message ENTER reduces
protection until the engine is started
again. EXIT cancels - select one of the
options:
If the movement and tilt detectors shall be deactivated: Press ENTER and lock the car.
If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func-
tion then it is switched off at the same time, see
page 124.
The next time the key is turned to position II the
system is reset to zero and the instrument
panel display shows the message FULL
GUARD at which the movement and tilt detec-
tors and the deadlocks function are re-
engaged.
or
If the detectors shall not be switched off: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector in the
passenger compartment 1. Open all the windows.
2. Arm the alarm. Activation of the alarm is
confirmed by the lamp flashing slowly.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Test the movement detector in the pas-
senger compartment, such as by lifting out
a bag from a seat. A siren should sound
and all direction indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control.
Test of alarm for doors 1. Arm the alarm.
2. Please wait 30 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade.
4. Open one of the doors. A siren should
sound and all direction indicators should
flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control.
Test of alarm for bonnet 1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement
detector.
2. Arm the alarm. Remain in the car and lock
the doors with the button on the remote
control.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard. A siren should sound and all
direction indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 128
evastarck
05 Locks and alarm
05
129
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 129
evastarck
G 02
09 12
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 132
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 134
Starting the engine................................................................................ 136
Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 138
Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 139
Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 141
Brake system........................................................................................ 145
DSTC Stability and traction control system*...................................... 147
Park Assist*........................................................................................... 149
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System................................................ 151
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 155
Start assistance.................................................................................... 158
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 159
Towing equipment*............................................................................... 161
Detachable towbar*............................................................................... 163
Loading................................................................................................. 167
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 168
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 130
evastarck
06 STARTING AND DRIVING
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 131
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
General
06
132
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
For more advice on reducing environmental
impact. see page 12.
Get the engine warmed up as soon as pos- sible.
Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light loads as soon as it is possible.
A cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.
Avoid braking too hard.
Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the car.
Do not use winter tyres when the roads are dry.
Remove load carriers when they are not being used.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
Engine and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example when
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and
cooling system will overheat.
Avoid overheating the cooling system
Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille if driving in extreme high tem- peratures.
Avoid overheating the engine Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm
(diesel engines: 3500 rpm) if driving with a
trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil tem-
perature could then become too high.
Open boot lid
Avoid driving with the boot lid open. If it is nec-
essary to drive with the tailgate open for a short
distance:
1. Close all windows.
2. Set the air distribution to the windscreen
and floor and run the fan at high speed.
WARNING
Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car through the cargo area.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
In greater depths, water can enter the trans- mission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 132
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
General
06
133
When driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling after
driving in water and mud.
IMPORTANT
Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart. Tow the car from the water.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat-
tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the igni-
tion key in position II when the engine is turned
off. Use ignition position I instead, as less
power is consumed.
Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area
supplies power even when the remote control
has been removed from the ignition switch.
Examples of functions that use a lot of power:
ventilation fan
windscreen wipers
audio equipment (high volume)
parking lights
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off.
If the battery voltage is low, a message appears
on the display. The energy-saving function
shuts down certain functions or reduces the
load on the battery by, for example, slowing the
ventilation fan and switching off the audio sys-
tem.
Charge the battery by starting the engine.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 133
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
134
Opening the fuel filler flap
G 02
07 99
Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater before refuelling!
Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the
lighting panel, see page 54. The engine must
be switched off before the flap can be opened.
The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.
Closing Push in the flap until you hear a click.
Fuel cap 1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resis-
tance is felt.
2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a
stop.
3. Take out the cap.
4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
NOTE
Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling. Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.
Opening from the cargo area
G 02
09 51
Manual opening of the fuel filler flap is easier
when the roof is closed, and is used when it is
not possible to open it from the passenger
compartment.
1. Remove the cover over the lamp housing
on the right-hand side of the cargo area.
2. Pull the cord hanging on the hook.
3. When the fuel filler flap has opened, refit
the cord and cover.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.
Fuel of a lower quality than that specified
should not be used as engine power and fuel
consumption can be negatively affected, see
page 269.
WARNING
Fuel which spills on to the ground can be ignited by the exhaust fumes.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 134
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
135
Petrol
IMPORTANT
Do not add cleaning additives to the petrol, unless recommended by Volvo.
For more information on petrol, see
page 269.
Diesel At low temperatures (5 C to 40 C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
can lead to ignition problems. For more infor-
mation, see page 270.
IMPORTANT
Use special winter grade fuel during cold months.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 135
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
136
Before starting the engine
Apply the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector in position P or N.
Manual gearbox Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch
pedal fully depressed. This is particularly
important in very cold conditions.
WARNING
Never remove the ignition key from the steering lock while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could oth- erwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.
The ignition key must be in position II when the car is being towed.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is in order that the emis- sions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.
Starting the engine
Petrol Turn the ignition key to position III. If the
engine does not start within 5 10 sec-
onds, release the key and try again.
Diesel 1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
> An indicator symbol in the combined
instrument panel shows that engine pre-
heating is underway, see page 47.
2. Turn the ignition key to position III when
the indicator symbol goes out.
Autostart (5-cylinder) With the autostart function, there is no need to
hold the ignition key (or ignition dial on cars
with Keyless Drive, see page 118) in posi-
tion III until the engine has started.
Turn the ignition key to the start position and
then release. The starter motor then works
automatically until the engine has started.
NOTE
If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold without waiting for engine preheating, then the automatic start sequence can be delayed for a couple of seconds.
Ignition switch and steering lock
0 Locked position The steering lock is activated
when the key is removed from
the lock.
I Radio position Certain electrical compo-
nents can be switched on.
The engine's electrical sys-
tem is not activated.
II Driving position The key position when driv-
ing. The car's electrical sys-
tem is energised.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 136
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
137
III Start position The starter motor is engaged.
When the key is released it
springs back automatically to
the driving position, once the
engine has started.
A ticking sound may be heard
if the key is between positions. Turn the key to
position II and back to eliminate the sound.
When the steering lock is activated If the front wheels are positioned so that there
is tension in the steering lock, a warning mes-
sage may be shown on the information display
and the car prohibited from starting.
1. Remove the key and turn the steering
wheel to release the tension.
2. Hold the steering wheel in this position.
Reinsert the key and make a new attempt
to start the car.
WARNING
Never remove the ignition key from the igni- tion switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock would be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.
WARNING
Always remove the ignition key from the ignition when leaving the car, especially if there are children in the car.
Make sure the steering lock is activated when
the car is left to reduce the risk of theft.
Ignition keys and electronic immobiliser
The ignition key must not hang with other keys
or metal objects on the same key ring. The
electronic immobiliser could be activated acci-
dentally.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 137
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Keyless drive*
06
138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G 01
94 10
The keyless drive system allows the car to be
unlocked, driven and locked without the need
for a key, see page 118.
The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the
same way as the key. One precondition for
starting the car is that the car's remote control
is located inside the passenger compartment
or the cargo area.
Starting the car
Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual
gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto-
matic gearbox).
Petrol engine Press in and turn the ignition dial to posi-
tion III.
Diesel engine 1. First turn the ignition dial to position II and
wait until the diesel indicator symbol in the
combined instrument panel goes out, see
page 47.
2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to
position III.
Starting with the remote control
G 01
94 20
If the remote control battery is discharged then
the Keyless Drive function does not work. In
which case, start the car by using the remote
control as ignition dial.
1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.
2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition
switch.
3. Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch and start in the same way as with
the ignition dial.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 138
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
06
139
Gear positions - five-speed
G 01
82 56
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
Reverse gear inhibitor - five-speed
G 01
82 57
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-
tionary.
To engage reverse gear, the gear lever must first be put in position N. Reverse gear cannot therefore be engaged directly from fifth gear due to the reverse gear inhibitor.
Gear positions - six-speed (petrol)
G 01
82 58
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
It may be difficult to find the positions for fifth
and sixth gear when the car is stationary as the
reverse gear inhibitor (which blocks sideways
movement towards reverse) is then not acti-
vated.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 139
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
06
140
Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed
(petrol)
G 01
82 59
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-
tionary.
NOTE
Reverse gear is electronically blocked if the car is travelling faster than approx. 20 km/h.
Gear positions - six-speed (diesel)
G 01
82 61
For the best possible fuel economy, use the
highest gear possible as often as possible.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.
Follow the shifting pattern indicated.
Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed
(diesel)
G 01
82 62
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-
tionary.
Engage reverse gear by pressing down the gear lever and moving it to the left.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 140
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
141
Geartronic automatic gear positions
G 01
82 64
D left-hand position: Automatic gear
changing.
M right-hand position: Manual gear chang-
ing.
P Parking position Select position P when you wish to start the
engine or park the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is selected.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed to move the gear lever from the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Always apply the
parking brake when parking the car.
R Reverse The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
N Neutral No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake when the car
is stationary with the gear selector in posi-
tion N.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed to move the gear selector from the N position if the car has been stationary for more than 3 seconds.
D Drive D is the normal driving position. The car auto-
matically shifts up and down depending on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
Geartronic manual gear positions
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever from position D to the right-hand end
position at M. The information display shifts the
indication from D to one of the figures 16,
depending which gear is engaged just then,
see page 45.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its rest position at M.
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change down a gear and release the lever.
The manual gearshift mode M can be selected
at any time while driving.
To return to automatic driving mode: move the
lever to the left-hand end position at D.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 141
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
142
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-
tion.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed the original
gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G 02
02 37
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special
safety systems:
Keylock To remove the ignition key, the gear selector
must be in the P position. The key is locked in
all other positions.
Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:
Hold your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another posi-
tion.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking
position (P position) To be able to move the gear selector from
the P position to other gear positions, the igni-
tion key must be in position II and the brake
pedal must be depressed.
Shiftlock Neutral (N position) If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least three sec-
onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run-
ning) then the gear selector is locked in the N
position.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition key
must be in position II.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 142
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
143
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor
G 01
82 63
In certain cases, it may be necessary to move
the car when it is not driveable, for example if
the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move
the car:
1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on
the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear
edge.
2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote
control.
3. Hold the key blade down and at the same
time move the gear lever out of the P posi-
tion.
Cold start
When starting in low temperatures, the gear
changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due
to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera-
tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear-
box shifts up later than normal when the engine
is started at low temperatures.
NOTE
Depending on the engine temperature when the engine is started, the idle speed after a cold start may be higher than normal for certain engine types.
Text message and action
In some situations the display can show a mes-
sage at the same time as a symbol is illumi-
nated.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 143
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
144
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action
TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO
HOLD
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-
stant engine speed.
Gearbox overheated. Keep the car station- A
TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY Significant pulling in the car's traction. Gearbox overheated. Park the car immedi-
ately in a safe mannerA.
A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows two steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the gearbox
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's elec-
tronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that the car is defective but instead show that a safety function has been activated inten- tionally to prevent damage to one of the car's components.
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 50.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk READ button.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 144
evastarck
ary using the foot brake .
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
145
Brake servo
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the
engine turned off, the brake pedal must be
pressed about five times harder than when the
engine is running. If the brake pedal is
depressed when the engine is started, you will
feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to
the brake servo becoming active. This may be
more noticeable if the car has Emergency
Brake Assistance (EBA).
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
NOTE
If braking with the engine switched off, press the brake pedal sharply once, not repeatedly.
Brake circuits
This symbol illuminates if a brake
circuit is not working.
If a fault should occur in one of the
circuits, it is still possible to brake
the car. The brake pedal will travel further and
may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure
on the pedal is needed to produce the normal
braking effect.
Dampness can affect braking
characteristics Brake components become wet when the car
is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water
or when the car is washed. This may alter brake
pad friction characteristics so that there is a
delay before braking effect is noticed.
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time
if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy
snow, as well as after setting off in very damp
or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads
and dries off any water. This precaution is also
recommended before parking the car for a long
period in such weather conditions.
If the brakes are used heavily
When driving in the Alps or other roads with
similar characteristics, the car's brakes are
heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not
being depressed especially hard.
Because speed is often low, the brakes are not
cooled as effectively as when driving on flat
roads at higher speed.
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down
when driving downhill instead of using the foot
brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as
you would use driving uphill. This uses engine
braking more efficiently so the foot brake is
only required for brief periods.
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an
additional load on the car's brakes.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
The anti-lock braking system
(ABS) prevents the wheels from
locking up during braking.
This means the ability to steer is
maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
hazard for example.
After the engine has been started, the ABS will
perform a brief self-test at a speed of
about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as
pulses in the brake pedal.
To get the most out of the ABS:
1. Depress the brake pedal with full force.
Pulses will be felt.
2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do
not release the pressure on the pedal.
Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf-
fic-free area and in different weather condi-
tions.
The ABS symbol illuminates for two seconds if
there was a fault in the ABS system when the
engine was last running.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 145
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
146
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA
(Emergency Brake Assistance) For sudden
braking, full-strength braking is provided
instantaneously. The EBA function senses
when heavy braking is underway by registering
how quickly the brake pedal is depressed.
Continue braking without easing off on the
brake pedal. The function is suspended when
the pressure on the brake pedal eases. This
function is always active. It cannot be disen-
gaged.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu- minate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop and have the brake system checked.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 146
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
DSTC Stability and traction control system*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147
General
The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control
system (STC/DSTC) improves the car's trac-
tion and helps the driver to avoid skidding.
A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking
or acceleration when the system is in action.
The car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during accel-
eration.
Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans-
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
ning to the one that is not.
Reduced operation
G 02
90 57
Thumbwheel 1
RESET button1
The stability system is activated automatically
each time the car is started.
System operation during skidding and accel-
eration can be partially deactivated. Operation
during skidding is then delayed and so allows
more skidding which provides greater freedom
for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or
sand is improved at the same time as acceler-
ation is no longer limited.
Operation Turn thumbwheel until the STC/DSTC
menu is shown.
DSTC ON means that the system function
is unchanged.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that
system operation is reduced.
Press and hold the RESET button until the
STC/DSTC menu is changed.
At the same time the symbol illumi-
nates as a reminder that the system has
been reduced.
The system remains reduced until the
engine is next started.
WARNING
Suppressing system function may alter the driving characteristics of the car.
NOTE
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on
the display and the symbol illuminates each time the engine is started.
1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 147
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
DSTC Stability and traction control system*
06
148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Messages on the information display
ANTI-SPIN TEMPORARILY OFF means that
the system has been temporarily reduced due
to excessive brake temperature. The function
is reactivated automatically when the brakes
have cooled.
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system
disabled due to a fault.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
If the message remains when the engine is
restarted, drive to an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Symbols in the combined instrument panel
DSTC system
Information
If the symbols and are displayed at the
same time, read the message on the informa-
tion display.
If the symbol appears alone then it may
appear as follows:
Flashing light means that the STC/DSTC system is now being activated.
Constant glow for two seconds means system check when the engine is started.
Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means that there is a fault in the STC/DSTC system.
Constant glow after deactivation reminds that the STC/DSTC system has been reduced.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 148
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149
General information on parking assistance
G 02
02 94
Parking assistance front and rear
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
A signal indicates the distance to a detected
obstacle.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- dren or animals near the car.
Variants Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only.
Both front and rear.
Function The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. If the volume of another
audio source from the audio system is high,
then this is automatically lowered.
The tone becomes constant at a distance of
about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this
distance both behind and in front of the car, the
signal alternates between left and right-hand
speakers.
Rear parking assistance only
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged and the message Park
Assist active, Exit to deactivate is shown on
the audio system display.
If the system is switched off, the display shows
Park Assist deactivated Enter to activate as soon as reverse gear is engaged. To change
the settings, see page 71.
The distance covered behind the car is
about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the
rear loudspeakers.
Limitations The system must be deactivated when revers-
ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier
would trigger the sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
Parking assistance both front and rear
G 01
83 89
Button for Off/On (here rear button).
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 149
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
06
150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Front Front parking assistance is active at speeds
below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at
higher speeds. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.
The distance covered to the front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in
front comes from the front loudspeakers.
Limitations Front parking assistance cannot be combined
with extra lights because the sensors are affec-
ted by the extra lights.
Rear Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles
behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.
Limitations See the previous section Rear parking assis-
tance only.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illumi-
nates with constant glow and the
display shows PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED then park-
ing assistance is disengaged. For
attention, contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Cleaning the sensors
G 02
09 52
Parking assistance sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 150
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151
General
G 02
02 95
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.
BLIS is an information system that under cer-
tain conditions can help to draw the driver's
attention to vehicles moving in the same direc-
tion in the so-called "blind spot".
The system is designed to work most effec-
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
BLIS is based on camera technology. The cam-
eras (1) are located under the door mirrors.
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside
the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu-
minates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the sys-
tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
in the information display. In such cases, check
and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system
can be switched off temporarily by pressing the
BLIS button, see page 152.
Blind spots
A
B
G 02
02 96
A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking The system is designed to react if you overtake
another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h
faster than the other vehicle.
The system is designed to react if you are over-
taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h
faster than your vehicle.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 151
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
06
152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with
headlamps that are switched off are not
detected by the system. This means for exam-
ple that the system does not react to a trailer
without headlamps which is towed behind a
car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to bicycles or mopeds.
The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by intensive light or when driving in the dark when there are no light sources (e.g. street lighting or other vehicles). The system may then interpret the lack of light as if the cam- eras have been blocked.
In both cases a message is shown on the information display.
When driving in such conditions system performance may be temporarily reduced and a text message is shown, see page 153.
If the message disappears automatically then BLIS has returned to normal function- ality.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.
Activating/deactivating
G 01
83 89
Button for activating/deactivating (here front but- ton).
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated by
pressing the BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button
goes out and a text message is shown on the
dashboard display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash three times. Press the READ but-
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 152
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153
ton to clear the text message. For more infor-
mation on messages, see page 50.
BLIS system message
Text on the dis- play
Specification
BLIS ON BLIS system on.
BLIS REDUCED
FUNCTION
The BLIS camera is
disrupted by fog or
strong sunlight, for
example, shining
directly into the
camera.
The camera resets
itself when the envi-
ronment has
returned to normal.
BLIS CAMERA
BLOCKED
One or both cam-
eras blocked.
Clean the lenses.
BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED
Blind spot system
disengaged.
Contact an author-
ised Volvo work-
shop.
BLIS OFF BLIS system off.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-
era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text BLIS SERVICE REQUIRED.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
G 01
81 76
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 153
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
06
154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 01
81 77
Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.
G 01
81 78
Low sun in the camera.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 154
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
155
Start assistance
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start. Do not tow the
car to bump start it, see page 158.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.
Towing
Find out the highest legal speed for towing
before towing the car.
1. Turn the ignition key to position II and
unlock the steering lock so that the car can
be steered, see page 137.
2. The ignition key must remain in position II
while the car is being towed.
3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently
depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent
jerks.
WARNING
The steering lock stays in the position it was in when the power was cut off. The steering lock must be unlocked before towing.
The ignition key must be in position II. Never remove the ignition key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.
NOTE
If the car is de-energised then the steering lock must be unlocked using a donor bat- tery before towing can be started.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.
2.0D 2.0D with automatic gearbox should not be
towed. As the transmission fluid cannot be
maintained at the correct operating tempera-
ture by the engine-driven circulation pump the
risk of damage to the gearbox is great.
However, the car can be towed for a short dis-
tance at low speed to move it from a dangerous
position - not further than 30 km and not faster
than 30 km/h.
IMPORTANT
Towing at temperatures below freezing point is strongly advised against.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 155
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
156
Towing eye
G 02
09 53
Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed
on the road. The towing eye is attached in the
recess on the right-hand side of the front or
rear bumper.
Fitting the towing eye 1. Take out the towing eye which is located in
the bag in the ski hatch or together with the
spare wheel.
2. Release the cover (1) on the bumper by
pressing on the marking on the lower edge
of the cover.
3. Screw in the towing eye (3) firmly, right in
up to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to
tighten the towing eye.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it
to its place.
Refit the cover on the bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads, not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the towbar's towball in the car, see page 161.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 156
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
157
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The car must always be towed with the wheels
rolling forward.
IMPORTANT
Cars with automatic gearbox must only be towed with drive wheels raised from the road.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 157
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Start assistance
06
158
Starting with a donor battery
G 02
02 98
If the battery in the car has become flat, you
can "borrow" electric current from either a sep-
arate battery or the battery in another car.
Always make sure the crocodile clips on the
jump leads are attached securely to eliminate
sparks during the start attempt.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid risk of explosion:
1. Turn the ignition key to position 0.
2. Ensure that the other battery is 12 volt.
3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch
off the engine in the other car and ensure
that the cars do not touch one another.
4. Connect the red jump lead between the
positive terminal on the donor battery (1+)
and the positive terminal in your car (2+).
5. Connect one end of the black jump lead to
the donor battery's negative terminal (3-).
6. Connect the other end of the black jump
lead to the earthing point (4) by the left-
hand strut tower.
7. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the
engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle 1500 rpm.
8. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-
tery.
9. Remove the jump leads, first the black and
then the red. Make sure that none of the
clamps on the black jump lead comes into
contact with the battery's positive terminal
or the clamp connected to the red jump
lead.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water.
If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 158
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
159
General
The load capacity is affected by extra acces-
sories mounted on the car, such as a towbar,
load carriers, space box, the passengers' com-
bined weight etc. as well as the load on the
towball. The load capacity of the car is reduced
by the number of passengers and their weight.
If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised
Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with
the necessary equipment for driving with a
trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket follows the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure decal location, see page 176.
Clean the towing bracket regularly and
grease the towball 1.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Please wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.
The engine and gearbox can overheat if the car is driven with a heavy load in hot weather. If the temperature gauge for the engine's cooling system goes into the red zone, stop and let the engine idle for a few minutes. The automatic gearbox responds through a built-in protection system. See the message on the information display. If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.
In the interests of safety, speed should be restricted to 80 km/h, even if the laws of certain countries allow for higher speeds.
Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Trailer weights
Information on permitted trailer weights, see
page 258.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.
Automatic gearbox, driving with a trailer
Parking on a hill 1. Apply the parking brake (handbrake).
2. Move the gear selector to parking position
P.
1 Does not apply to the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 159
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
160
Starting on a hill 1. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
tion D.
2. Release the parking brake (handbrake).
Steep inclines
Select an appropriate manual gear position when climbing steep inclines or at low speeds. This prevents the gearbox from changing up and keeps the gearbox oil cooler.
Do not use a higher manual gear than the engine can "handle". It is not always eco- nomical to drive in high gears.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 15%.
Diesel engine with manual gearbox, driving with a trailer
If the car is driven with a major load in a hot
climate, the engine cooling fan can be replaced
with one of a greater capacity than the stand-
ard model. Check with your nearest Volvo
dealer regarding the options for your car.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 160
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161
Towbar
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the towball mounting instructions must be fol-
lowed carefully, see page 163.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:
Follow the assembly instructions for the towball section carefully.
The towball section must be locked with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows green.
Important checks
The towball section's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.
Storing the towball section
G 03
11 13
Towball section storage location
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towball section after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.
Trailer cable
G 01
45 89
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 161
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Specifications
G 01
03 93 G
01 03
91
G 01
03 92
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)
A B C D E F G H I J K
Fixed or detachable towbar standard 1160 77 964 482 40 141 538 150 113 100 140
1 Side member
2 Ball centre
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 162
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163
Fitting the towball
G 01
73 17
1. Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch and then pulling the
cover straight back .
G 02
03 01
2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
G 02
03 02
3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows
red. If the window does not show red,
press in (1) and turn the locking wheel anti-
clockwise (2) until you hear a click.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 163
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 02
03 04
4. Insert the towball section until your hear a
click.
G 02
03 06
5. Check that the indicator window shows
green.
G 02
03 07
6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 164
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165
G 02
03 09
7. Check that the towball section is secure by
pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towball section should be clean and dry.
G 02
03 10
8. Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place.
Removing the towball
G 02
03 01
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 165
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 02
03 12
2. Push in the locking wheel (1) and turn it
anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.
G 02
03 14
3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towball rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if it is stored in the car, see page 161.
G 01
73 18
4. Push on the protective cover.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 166
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Loading
06
167
General
The load capacity is affected by extra acces-
sories mounted on the car and a towbar, as
well as the load on the towball.
The load capacity of the car is reduced by the
number of passengers and their weight. For
information on permitted weights, see
page 258.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
Loading the cargo area
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake
when loading or unloading long objects. The
gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out
of position by long loads, which could set the
car in motion.
Place the load firmly against the backrest in
front.
Put wide loads in the centre.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
Never load cargo above the backrest.
The protection provided by the inflatable curtain may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 167
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
168
Correct light pattern for left or right- hand traffic
G 02
03 17
Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.
Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a
control in each headlamp housing to avoid
dazzling oncoming motorists.
The correct pattern will also better illuminate
the verge.
Halogen headlamps
G 02
14 21
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
Headlamps with Bi-Xenon lights
G 02
14 22
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
WARNING
On cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps, their replacement must be carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Bi-Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 168
evastarck
06 Starting and driving
06
169
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 169
evastarck
G 02
09 18
170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 172
Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 176
Warning triangle* and spare wheel....................................................... 179
Changing wheels................................................................................... 182
Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 184
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 170
evastarck
07 WHEELS AND TYRES
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 171
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
172
Driving characteristics and tyres
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-
racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the
same type and dimensions, and preferably also
the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified on the tyre pressure label, see
page 176.
Designation of dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example: 205/55R16 91 W.
205 Section width (mm)
55 Ratio between section height and
width (%)
R Radial ply
16 Rim diameter in inches (")
91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed (in this case 270 km/h).
Speed ratings
The car is approved as a whole, which means
that dimensions and speed ratings must not
differ from those specified on the vehicle reg-
istration document. The only exception to
these conditions is winter tyres (both those
with metal studs and those without). If such a
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster
than the speed rating of the tyre (for example,
class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h).
Remember that traffic regulations determine
how fast a car can be driven, not the speed
class of the tyres.
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a
few years they begin to
harden at the same time as
the friction capacity/charac-
teristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as
fresh tyres as possible when
you replace them. This is especially important
with regard to winter tyres. The week and year
of manufacture, the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), are stated with
four digits, for example 1502. The tyre in the
illustration was manufactured in week 15
of 2002.
Tyre age All tyres older than six years should be checked
by an expert even if they seem undamaged.
The reason for this is that tyres age and decom-
pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.
The function can therefore be affected due to
the tyre's constituent materials being broken
down. In such a case the tyre should then not
be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter
tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples
of external signs which indicate that the tyre is
unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
The age of the tyre can be determined by the
DOT marking, see previous illustration.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 172
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
173
More even wear and maintenance
G 02
03 23
Tread wear indicators.
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 176. Driving style, tyre pres-
sure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10000 km intervals. Contact an
authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain
about tread depth.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up, and not standing up.
Tyres with tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific
winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are
dependent on engine variant. When driving on
winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500 1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyre. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore
recommended not to drive on winter tyres that
have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive
cars.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space
between the brake discs and the wheels is too
small.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author- ised Volvo workshop.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 173
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rims and wheel nuts
G 02
03 24
Standard wheel nuts.
Bulge acorn wheel nuts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-
ries. There are two types of wheel nut, depend-
ing on whether the rims are made of steel or
aluminium. Tighten the wheel nuts to 110 Nm.
Check the torque with a torque wrench.
IMPORTANT
The wheel nuts should be tightened to 110 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.
Steel rims standard wheel nuts (1) Steel rims are normally mounted with the
standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari-
ety may also be used.
WARNING
Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims. The wheel could come loose.
Aluminium rims bulge acorn wheel nuts
(2) Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with
aluminium rims. These differ markedly from
other nut types as they have a rotating conical
washer.
NOTE
These nuts may also be used with steel rims.
Locking wheel nuts Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu-
minium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking
wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel
covers, the locking wheel nut should be moun-
ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise
the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.
Spare wheel Temporary Spare*
The spare wheel is only intended to be used for
the short time it takes to get the normal wheel
replaced or repaired. Replace the spare wheel
with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The
car's handling may be altered by the use of the
spare wheel.
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 174
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
175
Summer and winter wheels
G 02
03 25
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side
of the car they were mounted on, for example
tern which are designed to only turn in one
direction have the direction of rotation marked
with an arrow.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direc-
tion throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only
be switched between front and rear positions,
never between left and right-hand sides, or
vice versa.
If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain, snow and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if you
are uncertain about tread depth.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 175
evastarck
L for left and R for right. Tyres with a tread pat-
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
176
Recommended tyre pressure
G 02
09 55
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar shows which pressures the tyres should
have at different load and speed conditions.
NOTE
Full load in the car equates to the number of seats with seatbelts.
Stated on the label:
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended wheel size
ECO pressure
Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare).
Checking the tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure regularly.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
Even after several kilometres of driving, the
tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So
air must not be released if the pressure is
checked when the tyres are warm. While the
pressure must be increased if it is too low.
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-
sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the
car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low can also result in the
tyres overheating and disintegrating.
For information on the correct tyre pressure,
refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified
tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature.)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre
pressure for full load is recommended in order
to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road
noise and steering characteristics.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 176
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
177
Tyre pressure table
Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load
Front (kPa) A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)
2.4
2.4i
215/55 R16 91W 0-160 210 210 250 250
160+ 250 210 280 260
215/50 R17 91W
235/45 R17 94W
235/40 R18 91Y
0-160 220 220 250 250
160+ 260 220 280 260
T5
2.0D
215/55 R16 91W 0-160 210 210 250 250
160+ 260 210 280 260
215/50 R17 91W
235/45 R17 94W
235/40 R18 91Y
0-160 220 220 250 250
160+ 270 220 290 270
D5 215/55 R16 91 W 0-160 230 210 250 250
160+ 260 210 280 260
215/50 R17 91W
235/45 R17 94W
235/40 R18 91Y
0-160 240 220 250 250
160+ 270 220 290 270
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 177
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
178
Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load
Front (kPa) A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)
All All 0-160 250 B 250 250 250
Spare
wheel C
T125/85R16 99M 0-80 420 420 420 420
A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. B ECO pressure see page 176. C Temporary Spare.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 178
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179
Warning triangle
G 02
09 56
Follow the regulations in force for the use of a
warning triangle*. Place the warning triangle in
a suitable place with regard to the traffic.
1. Undo the case containing the warning tri- angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take the warning triangle from the case.
2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
located in the spare wheel well.
Spare wheel and jack
G 02
09 59
Location, tools for emergency puncture repair kit.
The car's original jack The original jack must only be used for chang-
ing wheels. The jack's thread should always be
well greased. The jack and wheel wrench are
located in a foam block in the cargo area.
Emergency puncture repair kit For operation and location, see page 184.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 179
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel
07
180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Spare wheel and tools
G 02
09 60
Spare wheel and tools.
The spare wheel* is supplied in a tyre bag that
is located in the cargo area's spare wheel well.
In the centre of the tyre is a black foam block
containing jack and wheel wrench. The ten-
sioning strap for the bag is secured in two
lashing eyes on the floor.
1. Undo the two tensioning straps that secure the tyre bag to the floor.
2. Unzip the tyre bag and take out the tools.
3. Lift the spare wheel from the bag.
Place the damaged wheel in the tyre bag and
strap it down with the tensioning straps. Be
sure to follow the instructions on the spare
wheel bag when it is refitted.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 180
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181
Tools - returning into place
G 02
93 35
Jack return location for cars with spare wheel.
Tools and jack* must be returned into place in
the correct manner after use.
For cars equipped with spare wheel, the jack must be cranked to the correct posi- tion, see the preceding illustration.
For cars equipped with emergency punc- ture repair kit, the jack must be fully cranked together and returned into the foam block.
IMPORTANT
Tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.
First aid*
A case with first aid equipment is located in the
cargo area.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 181
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Removing wheels
G 02
03 31
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be
changed at a busy location. Make sure that the
car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel
wrench* that are located under the carpet
in the cargo area.
G 02
03 32
2. Apply the parking brake and engage first
gear, or position P if the car has an auto-
matic gearbox.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel
covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the
end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by
hand.
5. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench.
G 02
45 30
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack- ing point and the jack.
6. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground. Check that the jack is seated cor-
rectly in the intended jacking point, as illus-
trated, and that the base is located directly
under it.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 182
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
183
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the
wheel.
Fitting the wheel
1. Clean the contract surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel nuts are tightened
properly. Tighten to 110 Nm. Check the
torque with a torque wrench.
5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.
Ensure that passengers wait with the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 183
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Emergency puncture repair, general information
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as
a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle
must be replaced before its expiration date and
after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
12V sockets for the compressor are located by
the centre console in the front, by the rear seat
and in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical
socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Overview
G 02
04 00
Decal, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing punctured tyres
G 01
97 23
For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 184
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro- ken when the bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is
3.5 bar.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3
km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that
the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-
ficiently sealed. The journey should not be
continued. Contact a tyre centre.
4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 185
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
specified on the tyre pressure decal.
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Replacement must be performed by an authorised Volvo work- shop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit.
7. Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo work-
shop for the replacement/repair of the
damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that
the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V
sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
sure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Changing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle before the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 186
evastarck
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 187
evastarck
G 02
09 20
188
Cleaning................................................................................................ 190
Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 194
Rustproofing......................................................................................... 195
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 188
evastarck
08 CAR CARE
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 189
evastarck
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
190
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use
car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to
corrosion.
IMPORTANT
Avoid rinsing the car with the roof lowered in order to avoid water entering the passen- ger compartment.
Do not park the car in direct sunlight. Washing a car with hot paintwork can cause permanent paintwork damage. Wash the car in a car wash with waste water separator.
Thoroughly rinse dirt off the underbody of the car.
IMPORTANT
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. When using a pressure washer: Make sure that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the car using a cold degreasing agent.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp when it has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Removing bird droppings Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. This discoloration can only be
removed by a specialist.
Chromed wheels
IMPORTANT
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- warm water.
Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it can never replace
a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto-
matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 190
evastarck
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
191
IMPORTANT
The roof must be closed for automatic car washes.
The antenna by the boot lid should be unscrewed before automatic car washing.
IMPORTANT
Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is also more sensitive when it is new. For this reason, handwashing is recommended dur- ing the first few months with a new car.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the
same thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured
plastic parts, rubber and trim components
(such as glossy trim mouldings). When using
such a cleaning agent the instructions must be
followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
Electrically operated roof If the roof is wet when opened then water will
run into the passenger compartment. For this
reason, wait until the water has run off before
opening the roof.
Hatch cover The hatch cover, see page 95 is sensitive to
water and should therefore be dried with a
cloth if it becomes wet. Clean with a slightly
dampened rag.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white
spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-
work.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatment is not covered by Volvo warranty.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 191
evastarck
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cleaning door mirrors and front door windows with water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on mirror/glass surfaces
as this could ruin their water-repellent proper-
ties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
NOTE
Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.
Cleaning the interior
Treating stains on fabric upholstery A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning the fab-
ric upholstery. Other chemicals can impair the
fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and
approved in accordance with the Oeko-
Tex 100 standard.
The leather is refined and processed so that it
retains its natural characteristics. It is given a
protective coating, but regular cleaning is
required in order to maintain both characteris-
tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-
hensive product for the cleaning and treatment
of leather upholstery which, when used in
accordance with the instructions, preserves
the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-
ing more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and application of the protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's
Leather care product.
IMPORTANT
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Note that materials with colour that runs when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) may discolour the upholstery material.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 192
evastarck
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
193
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-
tection against stains and improved UV pro-
tection.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.
Never use strong stain removers.
Cleaning seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from your
Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
before allowing it to retract.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 193
evastarck
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
08
194
Paintwork
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and stains on the
edges of wings and doors.
Colour code
G 02
03 46
Data plate.
It is important that the correct colour is used.
The colour code number (1) is shown on the
data plate, see page 256.
Stone chips and scratches
G 02
03 45
Before touching up paintwork, the car must be
clean and dry and at a temperature above
15 C.
Materials
Primer in a can
Paint in a can or touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape.
Minor stone chips and scratches If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare
metal and there is an undamaged colour coat,
you can paint straight after cleaning the dam-
aged area.
If the stone chip has penetrated to the
bare metal 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a
brush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of lapping paste.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 194
evastarck
08 Car care
Rustproofing
08
195
Inspection and maintenance
Your car has already received a thorough and
complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of
the body are made of galvanised sheet metal.
The underbody is protected by a wear-resis-
tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene-
trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
members, cavities and closed sections.
Maintain the car's rustproofing.
Keep the car clean. Hose down the under- body. If using a pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur- faces.
Regularly check and touch-up the rust- proofing treatment as necessary.
The car's rustproofing does not normally
require treatment for approximately 12 years.
After this period, it should be treated at three-
year intervals. If the car needs further treat-
ment, please contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 195
evastarck
G 02
09 22
196
Volvo service......................................................................................... 198
Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 199
Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 200
Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 201
Wiper blades......................................................................................... 206
Battery................................................................................................... 207
Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 209
Fuses..................................................................................................... 215
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 196
evastarck
09 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 197
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service09
198
Volvo service programme
Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly
test driven. It was checked again in accord-
ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations
before it was handed over to you.
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos-
sible, follow the Volvo service programme
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry out
service and maintenance work. Volvo work-
shops have the personnel, special tools and
service literature to guarantee the highest qual-
ity of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Special service measures
Certain service measures which affect the car's
electrical system can only be performed using
electronic equipment specially developed for
your car. For this reason, always contact an
authorised Volvo workshop before beginning
or performing service work that affects the
electrical system.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 198
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance 09
199
Before starting work on the car
Battery Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine
is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).
Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-
tery. The battery cables must be disconnected
when charging the battery.
The battery contains acid that is both corrosive
and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the
battery in an environmentally correct manner.
Let your Volvo dealer assist you.
WARNING
High output from the ignition system. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dan- gerous. The ignition must therefore always be switched off for work in the engine com- partment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.
Check regularly
Check the following at regular intervals, for
example, when refuelling:
Coolant The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.
Engine oil The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Power steering fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Washer fluid The reservoir should be well filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera- tures around freezing.
Brake and clutch fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
WARNING
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 199
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment09
200
Opening the bonnet
G 01
05 99
1. Pull the handle on the far left under the
dashboard. You will hear when the catch
releases.
2. Insert your hand under the centre of the
front edge of the bonnet and press the
safety catch to the right.
3. Open the bonnet.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.
Engine compartment
Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con-
cealed behind the headlamp)
Engine oil dipstick*
Radiator
Radiator fan
Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand
drive)
Filler opening for engine oil*
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter*
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 200
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
201
Engine compartment decal for oil grade
G 02
03 41
IMPORTANT
Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see the engine compartment decal. Check the oil level frequently and change the oil regu- larly. The engine will be damaged if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven with the oil level too low.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade than that specified on the decal,
see page 263.
Checking the engine oil and oil filter
G 02
03 38
Dipstick, petrol engines.
G 02
03 40
Dipstick, diesel engines.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
Change the oil and oil filter in accordance with
the intervals specified in the Service and War-
ranty Booklet.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 201
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids09
202
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, other- wise you will risk affecting service life, star- ting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low
oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp
for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an
oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed
via the warning symbol in the centre of the
instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer-
tain models have both of the variants. Contact
an authorised Volvo dealer for more informa-
tion.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
The Service and Warranty Booklet specifies the
odometer readings for oil changes.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-
diately after the engine is switched off. The
dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
because the oil has not had time to flow down
into the oil sump.
Checking the oil
G 02
03 36
The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.
Checking the oil in a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking
the level.
2. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The
level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start
by topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until
the oil level is nearer the MAX than the
MIN mark on the dipstick, see page 263
for capacities.
Checking the oil in a warm engine 1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off
the engine and wait 10 15 minutes to
allow the oil time to run back to the sump.
2. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking
the level.
3. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The
level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by
topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil
level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on
the dipstick, see page 263 for capacities.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 202
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
203
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.
Washer fluid, topping up G
02 03
35
Location of washer fluid reservoir 1.
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
For capacities, see the table Fluids on page
267.
Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.
Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that
the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir
and hoses.
NOTE
Mix the washer antifreeze and water before filling the reservoir.
TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up
washer fluid.
Checking and topping up the coolant
G 02
03 34
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate.
1 Depending on engine alternative.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 203
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids09
204
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 267.
Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures
could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks)
to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when
the level falls to the MIN mark.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.
NOTE
The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High temperatures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.
Checking and topping up the brake and clutch fluid
G 02
03 33
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir 2. The fluid level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see the table Fluids on page 267.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent
braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi-
cal climates with high humidity.
2 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 204
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
205
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
Checking and topping up the power steering fluid
NOTE
Check the level frequently.
The fluid does not require changing. For
capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 263.
If a fault should arise in the power steering sys-
tem or if the car is without power and must be
towed, it can still be steered. However, the
steering will be much heavier than normal and
it will require more effort to turn the steering
wheel.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 205
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades09
206
Wiper blades
G 02
03 30
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the other side.
Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 190.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.
Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen
G 02
03 29
1. Turn up the wiper arm.
2. Press the button located on the wiper
blade mounting and pull straight out (1),
parallel with the wiper arm.
3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a
"click" is heard.
4. Check (3) that the blade is firmly installed.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 206
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
207
Battery care
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
ditions and climatic conditions.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally correct manner as it con- tains lead.
WARNING
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sul- phuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
Owner's Manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Changing the battery
Removing the battery 1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any
electrical terminals. The car's electrical
system has to store information in the con-
trol modules.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Disconnect the negative battery lead.
5. Disconnect the positive battery lead.
6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using
a screwdriver.
7. Release the clamp securing the battery.
8. Remove the battery.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 207
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Battery09
208
Fitting the battery 1. Fit the battery into position.
2. Fit the clamp securing the battery.
3. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.
4. Connect the positive lead.
5. Connect the negative lead.
6. Refit the cover over the battery.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 208
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
209
General
All bulb specifications are given on page 273.
The following list contains bulbs and point-
source lamps that are specialised or unsuitable
for changing except at a workshop:
General interior lighting in the roof
Reading lamps and glovebox lighting
Direction indicators, door mirror and approach lighting
High-level brake light
Bi-Xenon headlamp
WARNING
On cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps, the replacement of the Bi-Xenon lamp must be carried out by an authorised Volvo work- shop. The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Bi-Xenon lamp's high-voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
Changing front bulbs
G 00
73 34
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are
changed by first removing the lamp housing
from the engine compartment.
Removing the lamp housing 1. Remove the ignition key and turn the light
switch to position 0.
2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.
3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then
forward.
4. Unplug the connector by pressing down
the clip with a thumb while moving out the
connector with the other hand.
4
G 00
76 12
5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
Fitting the lamp housing 1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp
housing and locking pin. Check that the pin
is correctly inserted.
2. Check the lighting.
The lamp housing must be plugged in and
secured in place before the lighting is turned
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 209
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs09
210
on or the ignition key inserted into the ignition
switch.
Dipped beam
G 02
02 55
Removing the cover and bulb: 1. Remove the entire lamp housing.
2. Bend aside the catches and remove the
cover.
3. Release the spring clip securing the bulb.
First, press it to the left to release it, then
out and down.
4. Pull out the bulb.
5. Refit the lamp housing. G
00 73
39
Fitting a new bulb 1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi-
tion.
2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly
to the right in order to snap it into position.
3. Press the connector back on.
4. Refit the plastic cover.
5. Refit the lamp housing.
Main beam
G 00
73 38
1. Remove the entire lamp housing.
2. Left-hand headlamp:
turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Right-hand headlamp:
turn the bulb holder clockwise.
3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the
bulb.
4. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted
in one position.
5. Refit the lamp housing.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 210
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
211
Position/parking lamps
G 00
73 92
1. Withdraw the bulb holder using pliers. Do
not pull out the bulb holder by pulling the
electrical cable.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Press the bulb holder back on. It can only
be refitted in one position.
Direction indicators
G 00
73 93
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove it.
2. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,
press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.
3. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into
the lamp housing.
Side marker lamps
G 00
73 94
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
withdraw it. Replace the bulb.
2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one
position.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 211
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs09
212
Fog lamps
G 02
10 46
1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Remove the panel from around the lamp
housing.
3. Remove the two Torx screws securing the
lamp housing and take out the lamp hous-
ing.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.
6. Fit the new bulb and turn it clockwise.
7. Plug in the connector to the bulb.
8. Secure the lamp housing with the screws
and press the panel back into place.
Removing the bulb holder
G 02
09 63
All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster can be
changed from inside the cargo area.
Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
NOTE
If the error message BULB FAILURE/ CHECK STOP LAMP remains after a faulty bulb has been replaced then consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
Location of the bulbs in the rear light cluster
G 02
09 64
Bulb holder.
Brake light
Position/parking lamps
Rear fog lamp (one side)
Direction indicators
Reversing lamp
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 212
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
213
NOTE
The rear fog lamp bulb is only used in one of the rear light clusters. In the left-hand rear light cluster on left-hand drive cars, and in the right-hand rear light cluster on right- hand drive cars.
Number plate lighting
G 02
09 65
1. Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key
to position 0.
2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
3. Detach the lens carefully.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Refit and screw in the lens.
Courtesy lighting
G 02
07 95
There is courtesy lighting under the dashboard
on the driver and passenger sides.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lens detaches.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
4. Refit the lens.
Cargo area
G 02
09 68
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 213
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs09
214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Vanity mirror lighting*
G 02
02 53
Removing the mirror glass 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower
edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the
lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver under the edge on
both the left and right side (at the black
rubber points) and carefully prize so that
the lens releases at the lower edge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire
mirror glass and cover.
4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it with
a new one.
Fitting the mirror glass 1. First, press the three lugs at top edge of
mirror glass back into position.
2. Then press the three lower lugs back into
position.
Interior lighting, rear
G 02
09 69
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 214
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
215
General
All electrical functions and components are
fused to protect the car's electrical system
from damage by short circuiting and overload-
ing.
The fuses are in two different locations in the
car:
Relay/Fuse box in the engine compartment
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compart- ment.
Changing
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and blew.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
Each fuse box has space for several spare
fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then
there is a fault in the component. In which case,
contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have
the system checked.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 215
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses09
216
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment
G 00
74 46
The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to
replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the
same colour and amperage.
19 36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.
Fuses 7 18 are of the "JCASE" type and should be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop.
1 6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and may only be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop.
On the inside of the cover are tweezers to
assist removing and fitting fuses.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 216
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217
G 02
02 50
1. Radiator fan 50 A
2. Power steering (excl. 1.6 litre
engine) 80 A
3. Supply to passenger com-
partment fuse box 60 A
4. Supply to passenger com-
partment fuse box 60 A
5. Climate control element,
additional heater PTC* 80 A
6. Glow plugs (diesel) 70 A
7. ABS pump 30 A
8. ABS valves 20 A
9. Engine functions 30 A
10. Ventilation fan 40 A
11. Headlamp washers, power
roof, lockable storage com-
partment and ski hatch 20 A
12. Supply to heated rear window 30 A
13. Starter motor relay 30 A
14. Trailer wiring* 40 A
15. Power roof 30 A
16. Supply to infotainment sys-
tem 40 A
17. Windscreen wipers 30 A
18. Supply to passenger com-
partment fuse box 40 A
19. Reserve -
20. Horn 15 A
21. Fuel-driven additional heater,
passenger compartment
heater 20 A
22. Subwoofer 25 A
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 217
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses09
218
23. Engine control module ECM
(5-cyl. petrol) transmission
(TCM) 10 A
24. Heated fuel filter, PTC ele-
ment oil trap (diesel) 20 A
25. Reserve -
26. Ignition switch 15 A
27. A/C compressor 10 A
28. Reserve -
29. Fog lamp, front 15 A
30. Engine control module ECM
(4-cyl. diesel) 3 A
31. Reserve -
32. Injectors (petrol), mass air
flow sensor and turbo control
(diesel) 10 A
33. Lambda-sond, vacuum pump
(petrol), engine control mod-
ule ECM (diesel) 20 A
34. Pressure switch, climate con-
trol system, ignition coils (pet-
rol), glow plugs and EGR
emission control (diesel) 10 A
35. Engine sensors for valves,
relay coil, air conditioning
PTC element, oil trap (petrol),
engine control module ECM
(diesel), canister (petrol), MAF
mass air flow sensor (petrol) 15 A
36. Engine control module ECM
(not 5-cyl. diesel), accelerator
pedal position sensor,
lambda-sond (diesel) 10 A
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 218
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
219
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment
G 02
06 01
The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses
are located under the glovebox. The box also
provides space for several spare fuses. Tools
for fuse replacement are located in the relay/
fuse box in the engine compartment, see
page 216.
Replacing fuses: 1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse box
by pressing in the pin in the centre of the
clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw-
ing the clips.
2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure the
fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove
them.
3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it
towards the seat until it stops. Lower it
completely. The fuse box can be fully
unhooked.
4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.
5. Remove the pins from the centre of the
clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the
pins into the clips. This expands the clips
and secures the trim.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 219
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses09
220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 02
02 46
43. Phone, audio system, RTI
(option) 15 A
44. SRS system, engine con-
trol module ECM (5-cyl.) 10 A
45. Electrical socket, pas-
senger compartment 15 A
46. Passenger compart-
ment, glovebox and
courtesy lighting 5 A
47. Interior lighting 5 A
48. Washer 15 A
49. SRS system 10 A
50. Reserve -
51. Additional heater for the
passenger compartment,
fuel filter relay, heating 10 A
52. Transmission control
module (TCM), ABS sys-
tem 5 A
53. Power steering 10 A
54. Parking assistance, Bi-
Xenon * 10 A
55. Keyless control module 20 A
56. Remote control module,
siren control module 10 A
57. Data link connector
(DLC), brake light switch 15 A
58. Main beam (right), auxili-
ary lamps relay coil 7,5 A
59. Main beam, left 7,5 A
60. Seat heating (driver's
side) 15 A
61. Seat heating (passenger
side) 15 A
62. Reserve -
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 220
evastarck
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
221
63. Supply, power window,
right rear 20 A
64. Lamp for door lock, RTI 5 A
65. Infotainment system 5 A
66. Infotainment control
module (ICM), climate
control 10 A
67. Reserve -
68. Cruise control 5 A
69. Climate control, rain sen-
sor, BLIS button 5 A
70. Reserve -
71. Reserve -
72. Reserve -
73. Overhead console for
interior lighting (OHC),
rear seatbelt reminder 5 A
74. Fuel pump relay 15 A
75. Reserve -
76. Reserve -
77. Electrical socket in cargo
area, accessory elec-
tronic module (AEM) 15 A
78. Reserve -
79. Reversing lamp 5 A
80. Reserve -
81. Supply, power window,
left rear 20 A
82. Supply, power window
and door, right front 25 A
83. Supply, power window
and door, left front 25 A
84. Power passenger seat 25 A
85. Power driver's seat 25 A
86. Interior lighting, cargo
area lighting, power
seats 5 A
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 221
evastarck
G 02
09 24
222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 224
Audio functions..................................................................................... 226
Radio functions..................................................................................... 230
CD functions......................................................................................... 235
Menu structure audio system............................................................. 238
Phone functions*................................................................................... 239
Menu structure phone*....................................................................... 246
Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 249
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 222
evastarck
10 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 223
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
General
10
224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Infotainment system
G 02
02 45
POWER - button
Display
Keypad
MENU - Menu system
Navigation buttons
EXIT - Exits the menu system
ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates
Infotainment is a system that integrates the
audio system and phone*. The infotainment
system can be easily operated using the con-
trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see
page 62. The display (2) shows messages and
information on the current function.
Audio system
On/Off POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio sys-
tem. If the audio system is active when the
ignition key is turned to position 0 then it con-
tinues to be active until the key is removed from
the ignition switch. The audio system is started
automatically the next time the key is turned to
position I.
Menus
Some infotainment system functions are con-
trolled via a menu system. The current menu
level is shown at the top right of the display.
Menu options are shown in the middle of the
display.
MENU (4) leads to the menu system.
Up/down with the navigation button (5) moves between menu options.
ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates one of the menu options.
EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the menu system.
Shortcuts Menu options are numbered and can also be
selected directly with the keypad (3).
Equipment
The audio system can be equipped with differ-
ent options and different versions. There are
three audio system versions:
Performance
High Performance
Premuim Sound
FM and AM radio with RDS and CD player is
however included in each version.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II 1
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the two
stereo audio channels to left, centre, right and
rear speakers. This provides a more realistic
sound quality than that provided by standard
two-channel stereo.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the
Dolby icon are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
1 Premium Sound
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 224
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
General
10
225
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manu-
factured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 225
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
226
Audio controls
G 01
98 05
VOLUME - Knob
AM/FM Audio source selection
MODE - Audio source selection, CD/AUX
TUNING - Knob
SOUND - Button
Navigation button - Tuning and menus
Volume Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad
to regulate the volume, see page 62. Audio vol-
ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi-
cle speed, see page 229.
Audio source selection Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches
between FM1, FM2 and AM.
Repeatedly pressing MODE switches between
CD och AUX.
AUX 1
The AUX input in the tunnel console can be
used for connecting an MP3 player for exam-
ple. A standard cable to an iPod or other MP3
player has space between the cover and edge
of the storage compartment.
G 02
12 96
Input for external audio source (AUX) 3.5 mm.
NOTE
The sound quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.
Sometimes the AUX external audio source can
be heard at a different volume to the internal
audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio
volume of the external audio source is too high
then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre-
vent this by adjusting the input volume of the
AUX input.
1 Not available for the Performance audio system if Bluetooth is installed.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 226
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
227
1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using
MODE.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to AUX input Volume and press
ENTER.
4. Turn TUNING or press right/left on the nav-
igation button.
USB/iPod connection 2
G 01
98 23
An iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the car's infotainment system via the USB contact in the centre console.
It is possible to connect an iPod, other MP3
player or a USB memory for example to the
car's infotainment system via the contact in the
centre console.
The audio source needs to be selected
depending on what is connected:
1. Select iPod or USB with MODE. The text
Connect Device appears on the display.
2. Plug the storage media into the connector
in the centre console's storage compart-
ment (see preceding illustration).
The text Loading appears on the display when
the system loads the files on the storage
media. This takes a while.
When the loading is finished the track informa-
tion is shown on the display and it is possible
to select the track required.
Track selection can take place in two ways:
1. Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock-
wise
2. or use the navigation control's (6) right or
left-hand button to scroll to the required
track.
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad then it is also possible to change tracks
using these controls.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music files in the most common variants of the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. There are also variants of these audio formats that are not supported by the system.
USB memory To facilitate the use of USB memory, avoid
storing any files other than music files in the
memory. It takes considerably longer for the
system to load storage media that contains
items other than compatible music files.
MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
iPod player The iPod player is charged and powered by the
system via the connecting cable. However, if
the iPod's battery is completely discharged
then it must be charged before the iPod player
is connected.
2 Certain audio systems.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 227
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
When an iPod is used as an audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure similar to the menu structure of the iPod player. See the iPod manual for detailed information.
For further information, see the accessory
manual for USB/iPod Music Interface.
Audio settings
Adjusting audio settings Press SOUND repeatedly to browse among
the following options. Adjust by turning
TUNING.
BASS - Bass level.
TREBLE - Treble level.
FADER Balance between the front and rear speakers.
BALANCE Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.
SUBWOOFER* - Bass speaker level. Sub- woofer must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer below.
CENTRE 3 - Level for centre speaker. Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II must be activated before adjustment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deacti- vating surround sound below.
SURROUND3 - Level for surround. Pro Logic II must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Audio settings below.
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer
Press MENU and then ENTER.
Scroll to AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.
Surround3
Surround settings govern the spatial
perception of the sound. Settings
and activating/deactivating are sep-
arate for each audio source.
G 02
12 16
The Dolby icon in the display indicates that
Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three dif-
ferent settings for surround sound:
Pro Logic II
3 channel
Off - 2 channel stereo.
Activating/deactivating surround sound 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to AUDIO SETTINGS and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Surround FM/AM/CD/AUX and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Pro Logic II 4, 3 channel or Off and press ENTER.
Equalizer front/rear 5
The equalizer can be used to adjust different
frequency bands separately.
Adjusting equalizer 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to AUDIO SETTINGS and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Equalizer Front or Equalizer
Rear and press ENTER.
4. The graphic on the display indicates the
audio level of the frequency in question.
3 Premium Sound. 4 Not available in AM and FM mode. 5 Certain audio systems.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 228
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
229
5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/
down with the navigation button. Addi-
tional frequencies can be selected using
the left/right navigation button.
6. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.
Automatic volume control 6
The auto volume control function allows the
audio volume to increase as the speed of the
car increases. There are three levels to choose
from: Low, Medium and High.
Adjusting automatic volume control 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to AUDIO SETTINGS and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Automatic volume control and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press
ENTER.
Automatic audio settings The acoustic properties of the passenger com-
partment are changed when speed increases
or when the roof is opened. For this reason the
character of the sound is automatically adap-
ted to these situations in order to provide the
best possible sound. The adaptation that takes
place when the roof is opened is fully auto-
matic.
Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-
ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and
Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be
able to adapt the sound reproduction accord-
ing to personal taste.
6 Not Performance Sound.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 229
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
230
Radio controls
G 01
98 06
FM/AM Wavelength selection
Station presets
TUNING Knob for station searches
SCAN Scanning
Navigation button - Tuning and menus
EXIT - Cancel current function
AUTO Automatic storage of stations
Tuning
Automatic tuning 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Give a brief press on or .
Manual tuning 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING
(3).
Tune into a station with a long press on or
. Or by using the steering wheel keypad:
Hold in or on the navigation button
depressed until the desired frequency
appears on the display.
As long as the frequency graphic appears on
the display, searching can be resumed by
briefly pressing or .
Storing stations
Ten station presets can be stored per wave-
length. FM has two memories for presets:
FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected
using the preset buttons (2) or the steering
wheel keypad.
Storing stations manually 1. Tune into a station.
2. Hold a station preset button depressed
until the message Station stored appears
on the display.
Automatic storage of stations AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta-
tions and stores them automatically in a sepa-
rate memory. The function is especially useful
in areas where the radio stations and their fre-
quencies are unfamiliar.
Starting automatic storage of stations 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed until
Autostoring appears on the display.
Once Autostoring disappears from the dis-
play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-
ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the
display. The automatically stored presets can
now be selected using the preset buttons (2).
Cancelling automatic storage of stations Press EXIT (6).
Selecting an auto-stored preset Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro-
vides access to the autostored presets.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7).
> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button (2).
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 230
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
231
> The radio remains in Auto mode until it
is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7),
EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1).
Storing autostored presets in another
memory An autostored preset can be transferred to the
FM or AM memory.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7).
> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button.
3. Press the button under which the station
will be stored and hold it depressed until
the message Station stored appears on
the display.
> The radio exits Auto mode and the
stored station can be selected as a pre-
set.
Scanning
SCAN (4) automatically searches through a
wavelength for strong stations. When a station
is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds
before scanning is resumed.
Activating/deactivating Scan 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.
2. Press SCAN to activate.
> SCAN appears on the display. Close
using SCAN or EXIT.
Storing a station A selected station can be stored as a preset
while SCAN is active.
Press a station preset button and hold it
depressed until the message Station
stored appears on the display.
> Scanning is interrupted and the stored
station can be selected as a preset.
RDS functions
Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS
radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme form, such as traffic information or news.
Receives text information on current radio programme.
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality.
Programme functions
In FM mode, the radio can search for stations
with certain programme types. If a required
programme type is located the radio can
switch stations interrupting the audio source
currently in use. For example, if the CD player
is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans-
mission is played at a preset audio volume, see
page 234. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and audio volume when the set
programme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm ( ALARM),
traffic information ( TP), news ( NEWS), and
programme types ( PTY) interrupt one another
in order of priority, where alarm has the highest
priority and programme types has the lowest.
For further programme interruption settings,
see EON and REG see page 233. The pro-
gramme functions are modified via the menu
system, see page 224.
Returning to the interrupted audio
source Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio
source.
Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci-
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 231
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
232
message ALARM! appears on the display
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information TP This function allows traffic informa-
tion broadcast within a set station's
RDS network to break through. TP shows that the function has been
activated. If the set station can send traffic
information then appears on the display.
G 02
12 20
Activating/deactivating TP 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
TP from current station/all stations The radio can interrupt with traffic information
from only the set (current) station or from all
stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to TP STATION and press ENTER.
> Either TP from current station or TP
from all stations is shown on the dis-
play.
6. Press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating TP search TP search is useful during long journeys while
an audio source other than the radio is being
played. The function automatically searches
for traffic information within different RDS net-
works.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.
News This function allows news broad-
casts within a set station's RDS net-
work to break through. The message
NEWS shows that the function is
activate.
G 02
12 21
Activating/deactivating News 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.
News from current station/all stations The radio can interrupt with news from only the
set (current) station or from all stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to News station and press
ENTER.
> Either News from current station. or
News from all stations is shown on the
display.
5. Press ENTER.
Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to
select different programme types,
such as Pop and Serious classic.
The PTY symbol indicates that the
function is active. This function allows pro-
gramme types broadcast within a set station's
RDS network to break through.
G 02
12 22
Activating/deactivating PTY 1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Select PTY and press ENTER.
> A list of programme types appears:
Current affairs, Information etc. The
PTY function is activated by selecting
programme types and deactivated by
clearing all PTYs.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 232
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
233
5. Select the desired programme types or
Clear all PTY.
Search PTY This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. Activate PTY.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-
gramme types, >| To seek appears on the
display. Press the navigation button to con-
tinue searching for another broadcast of the
selected programme types.
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the display.
NOTE
Not all radio stations support this function.
Activating/deactivating display 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
tion can be shown on the display.
Activating/deactivating radio text 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.
Automatic frequency update AF
The AF function selects one of the strongest
transmitters for a set station. The radio may
sometimes need to search through the entire
FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If
this occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek
Press Exit to cancel appears in the display.
Activating/deactivating AF 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.
Regional radio programmes REG
This function causes the radio to con-
tinue with a regional transmitter even
if its signal strength is low. REG indi-
cates that the function is active. The
regional function is normally deactivated.
G 02
12 23
Activating/deactivating REG 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.
Enhanced Other Networks EON
The EON function is especially useful in urban
areas with many regional radio stations. It
allows the distance between the car and the
radio station transmitter to determine when
programme functions should interrupt the cur-
rent audio source.
Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.
Distant 1 interrupts if the station trans- mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.
Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.
1 Factory sett.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 233
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
234
Activating/deactivating EON 1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to EON and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press
ENTER.
Resetting RDS functions
Resets all radio settings to the original factory
settings.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Reset all and press ENTER.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types are heard at
the volume selected for each programme type.
If the volume level is adjusted during the pro-
gramme interruption, the new level is saved
until the next programme interruption.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 234
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235
CD function controls
G 01
98 07
Navigation button Fast forward/rewind,
track selection and menus
CD changer position selection*
CD insertion/eject
CD insertion/eject slot
MODE - Audio source selection CD or
AUX*
TUNING - Knob for track selection
Starting playback (CD player) If a music CD is in the player when the audio
system is in CD mode then playback is started
automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and
change to CD mode by pressing MODE.
Starting playback (CD changer*) If a CD position with a music CD is already
selected when the audio system is activated
then playback starts automatically. Otherwise
change to CD changer mode using MODE and
select a disc with the number buttons 16 or
Up/Down on the navigation button.
Insert a CD 1. Select an empty position with buttons 1
6 or Up/Down on the navigation button.
> An empty position is marked on the dis-
play. The text Insert disc shows that a
new disc can be inserted. The CD
changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.
2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.
CD eject A CD will stay in the ejected position for
approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-
inserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-
ton .
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc. The message Eject all is shown in the
display.
Pause If the volume is turned down completely, the
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted
when volume is increased.
Audio files* The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA
format audio files.
NOTE
Certain types of copy-protected audio files cannot be read by the player.
When a CD containing audio files is inserted
into the player the disc's directory structure is
read in. It may take a while before playback
starts due to the quality of the disc.
Navigation and playback If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD
player then ENTER displays the disc's direc-
tory structure. The directory structure is navi-
gated in the same way as the audio system's
menu structure. Audio files have the symbol
and directories have the symbol . Start
audio file playback with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play-
back of the other files in the same directory
continues. Directory change takes place auto-
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 235
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
236
matically when all files in the current directory
have been played back.
Press left/right on the navigation button if the
display is not wide enough to show the whole
audio file name.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files Short presses right/left on the navigation but-
ton are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio
files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD
tracks/audio files. TUNING (or the steering
wheel keypad) can also be used for this pur-
pose.
Scan CD This function plays the first ten seconds of
each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti-
vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue
playback of the current CD track/audio file.
Random This function plays the tracks in random order.
The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-
led through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks on the current disc.
Different messages appear on the display
depending on which random function has been
selected.
RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played
RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played.
RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio files in a directory on the current CD are played.
Activating/deactivating (CD player) If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
If a disc with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and press
ENTER.
Activating/deactivating (CD changer) If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press
ENTER.
The option All discs only applies to the music
CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single Disc or Folder and press
ENTER.
The function is deactivated when another CD
is selected.
Disc text If title information is stored on a music CD then
it can be shown on the display 1.
Activating/deactivating 1. Start CD playback.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.
CDs Using low quality CD discs could result in poor
or non-existent sound.
1 Applies to CD changer
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 236
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
237
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 237
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure audio system
10
238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview
FM menu
1. News
2. TP
3. PTY
4. Radio text
5. Advanced radio settings
6. Audio settings*
AM menu
1. Audio settings*
CD menu
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5. Audio settings*
CD changer menu
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5. Audio settings*
AUX menu
1. AUX volume
2. News
3. TP
4. Audio settings*
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 238
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239
Overview - Phone system components
6
5
432
1
G 01
98 41
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 239
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Phone system components
1. Antenna
2. Steering wheel keypad Most phone system functions can be accessed
via the keypad. see page 241.
3. Microphone The hands free microphone is integrated in the
roof console beside the rearview mirror.
4. Centre console control panel All phone functions (except call volume) can be
regulated via the control panel.
5. Privacy handset
6. SIM card reader
General
Always put traffic safety first.
If the driver needs to use the privacy hand- set, park the car in a safe place first.
Switch off the phone system when refuel- ling the car.
Switch off the system near blasting work.
Only entrust phone system servicing to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made
without a SIM card as long as there is coverage
by a GSM operator.
Making an emergency call 1. Activate the phone.
2. Ring the emergency number that applies to
your region (within EU: 112).
3. Press ENTER.
IDIS
The IDIS system (Intelligent Driver Information
System) allows incoming phone calls and SMS
messages to be delayed so that the driver can
concentrate on driving. Incoming calls and
SMS messages can be delayed 5 seconds
before they are connected. Missed calls are
shown on the display. IDIS can be deactivated
using menu function 5.5, see page 246.
SIM card
G 02
02 44
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card (Subscriber Identity Module). The card is
available from various network operators. Con-
tact your network operator if you experience
difficulties with the SIM card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact your network operator if you need to change your SIM card.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 240
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241
Double SIM cards Many network operators offer two SIM cards
for the same phone number. The extra SIM
card can be used in the car.
Inserting the SIM card 1. Switch off the phone and open the glove-
box.
2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM
card reader, see illustration on page 240.
3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the
metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of
the SIM card should align with the bevel of
the SIM card holder.
4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.
Menus
Page 246 describes how to control phone
functions with the menu system.
Traffic safety
For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu
system cannot be accessed at speeds in
excess of 8 km/h.
Phone controls
G 01
98 09
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME - Control the background vol-
ume from the radio, for example, during a
call.
Number and letter buttons
MENU - Opens the main menu
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char-
acters
Navigation button Scroll in menus and
character rows
ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but-
ton reveals latest dialled numbers
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
Steering wheel keypad
G 02
02 43
When the phone is active, the steering wheel
keypad is locked to phone functions. To con-
trol the audio system, the phone must be in
standby mode (standby).
ENTER Works the same as on the control
panel.
EXIT Works the same as on the control
panel.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 241
evastarck
Call volume Increase/decrease.
Navigation buttons Scroll in menus.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
On/Off
A handset appears in the display when the
phone system is active or in standby mode
(standby). If the ignition key is turned to posi-
tion 0 when the phone is in one of these modes,
the phone automatically resumes this mode
the next time the ignition key is turned to posi-
tion I or II.
Activating the phone system Phone system functions can only be used
when the phone is in active mode.
1. Press PHONE.
2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press
ENTER.
Deactivating the phone system No calls can be received when the phone is
deactivated.
Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is
deactivated.
Standby mode (standby) In standby mode, the audio system can be in
use while calls are received. However, it is not
possible to make calls when in standby mode.
Putting the phone in standby mode The phone must first be in active mode before
it can be put in standby mode.
Press PHONE.
Activating from standby mode Press PHONE.
Making and receiving calls
If the privacy handset is raised when a phone
call is started, the sound will come from the
handsfree system. For information on switch-
ing between privacy handset and handsfree
during a call, see page 244.
To call 1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 244.
3. Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release
the handset by pressing it down.
Receiving a call For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see
page 246.
Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release
the handset by pressing it down.
Ending a call Press EXIT or hang up the handset.
Refusing a call Press EXIT.
Call waiting A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates
that there is another incoming call. Answer? appears on the display. The call can be refused
or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming
call is taken, the previous call is put on hold.
Putting a call on hold/resuming a call 1. Press MENU or ENTER.
2. Scroll to Hold or Hold off and press
ENTER.
Dialling a third party 1. Put the call on hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party.
Switching between calls 1. Press MENU or ENTER.
2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.
Starting a conference call A conference call consists of at least three par-
ties that can talk to one another. Once a con-
ference call has been initiated, no more parties
can be connected. All calls are ended when a
conference call is ended.
1.
2. Press MENU or ENTER.
3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 242
evastarck
Start two phone calls.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243
Volume
The phone uses the driver's door speaker.
Call volume Call volume is regulated with
the steering wheel keypad.
If the privacy handset is used,
volume is regulated with a
wheel on the side of the hand-
set.
Audio system volume Audio system volume is temporarily lowered
during a phone call. Once the call is ended the
previous volume is resumed. If the volume is
regulated during the call, the new level is
retained once the call is ended. Sound can also
be automatically muted during a phone call,
see menu 5.4.3, on page 248. This function
only applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys-
tem.
Entering text
Text is entered using the phone keypad.
1. Press the key with the desired character -
once for the first character on the button,
twice for the second, etc. See table.
2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a
row are to be entered using the same but-
ton, press * or wait a few seconds.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered
characters.
Key Function
space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )
a b c 2
d e f 3
g h i 4
j k l 5
m n o 6
p q r s 7
t u v 8
w x y z 9
Pressed briefly if two characters
shall be entered after each other
with the same key.
Key Function
+ 0 @ * # & $ / %
Switch between upper and lower
case.
Handling numbers
Calling the last number dialled The phone automatically stores the last phone
numbers dialled.
1. Press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.
Phone book If the phone book contains a live caller's con-
tact information then this is shown in the dis-
play. Contact information can be stored on the
SIM card and in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book 1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to New number and press ENTER.
4. Enter a name and press ENTER.
5. Enter a number and press ENTER.
6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone and press
ENTER.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 243
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Searching for contacts in the phone book Use the down arrow of the navigation button
instead of MENU for direct access to the
Search menu.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and Phone book 1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Copy all and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.
Deleting contacts from the phone book 1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press
ENTER.
6. Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.
Erase all contacts 1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and
press ENTER.
If required, enter phone code. The factory-set
default code is 1234.
Speed dial A keypad button (19) can be used as a speed
dial number for a contact in the phone book.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Speed dial and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Select numbers and press
ENTER.
5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for
the speed dial number and press ENTER.
6. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu
system.
Calling using speed dial Briefly press the required keypad button,
followed by ENTER.
NOTE
When the phone is switched on, it takes a while before speed dialling is available.
To use the speed dial function Speed dial
must be activated in the Phone book menu,
see page 247.
Calling from the phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
> All contacts in the phone book memory
are displayed. The number of contacts
displayed can be reduced by entering
part of the contact's name.
3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.
NOTE
Press ENTER to dial.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 244
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245
NOTE
Hold in the required letter/button in the key- pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor- responding letter in the phone book.
Functions during a call
Several functions are available during a call.
Some functions can only be used when a call
is on hold.
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access
the In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol-
lowing alternatives:
1. Mute/Mute off Mute mode.
2. Hold/Hold off - Put a call on hold or
resume a call.
3. Handsfree/Handset - Use handsfree or
the privacy handset.
4. Phone book Show phone book.
5. Join Conference calling (available if more
than three parties are connected).
6. Swap Switch between two calls (availa-
ble if up to three parties are connected).
SMS - Short Message Service
Reading SMS 1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.
> The message text is shown in the dis-
play. Additional selections can be made
by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT
depressed to leave the menu system.
Writing and sending 1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.
4. Enter text and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.
6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
IMEI number
To block the phone, you must provide your
network operator with the phone's IMEI num-
ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is
programmed into the phone. Dial *#06# to
show this number in the display. Write it down
and keep it in a safe place.
Specifications
Output 2 W
SIM card Small
Memory entries 250 A
SMS (Short Message Serv-
ice)
Yes
Data/Fax No
Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes
A The capacity of the SIM card's memory varies depending on SIM card type.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 245
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure phone*
10
246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Phone menu
1. Call register
1.1. Missed calls
1.2. Received calls
1.3. Dialled no.
1.4. Erase list
1.4.1. All calls
1.4.2. Missed calls
1.4.3. Received calls
1.4.4. Dialled no.
1.5. Call duration
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timers
2. Phone book
2.1. New number
2.2. Search
2.3. Copy all
2.3.1. SIM to phone
2.3.2. Phone to SIM
2.4. Speed dial
2.4.1. Active
2.4.2. Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
2.6. Erase phone
2.7. Memory status
3. Messages
3.1. Read
3.2. Write
3.3. Message settings.
3.3.1. SMSC number
3.3.2. Validity time
3.3.3. Message type
4. Call options
4.1. Send my no.
4.2. Call waiting
4.3. Auto answer
4.4. Automatic redial
4.5. Voice mail number
4.6. Call divert
4.6.1. All calls
4.6.2. When engag.
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Tel. settings
5.1. Network
5.1.1. Automatic
5.1.2. Manual select
5.2. SIM security
5.2.1. On
5.2.2. Off
5.2.3. Automatic
5.3. Change PIN code
5.4. Sounds
5.4.1. Ring volume
5.4.2. Ring signal
5.4.3. Mute radio
5.4.4. Msg. beep
5.5. IDIS
5.6 Factory settings
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 246
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure phone*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247
Description of menu options
1. Call register
1.1. Missed calls List of missed calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.2. Received calls List of received calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.3. Dialled no. List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.4. Erase list Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and
1.3 as below.
1.4.1. All
1.4.2. Missed
1.4.3. Received
1.4.4. Outgoing
1.5. Call duration Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.
To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timers
2. Phone book
2.1. New number Store names and phone numbers in the phone
book, see page 243.
2.2. Search Search for a name in the phone book.
2.3. Copy all Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM
card to the phone memory.
2.3.1. From SIM to phone memory
2.3.2. From phone to SIM memory.
2.4. Speed dial A number stored in the phone book can be
stored as a speed dial number.
2.5. Erase SIM Erase the entire SIM card memory.
2.6. Erase phone Erase the entire phone memory.
2.7. Memory status Shows how many positions are occupied in the
SIM card and phone memory. The table shows
how many of the total number of positions are
occupied, e.g. 100 (250).
3. Messages
3.1. Read Received text messages. Select whether to
erase, forward, change or save the entire mes-
sage or parts of it.
3.2. Write Write a message using the keypad. Choose
whether to save or send it.
3.3. Message sett Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes-
sage centre to which messages are to be trans-
ferred as well as how long they are to be saved
at the message centre. Contact your network
operator for information on message settings.
Normally, these settings should not be altered.
3.3.1. SMSC number
3.3.2. Validity time
3.3.3. Message type
4. Call options
4.1. Send my no. Displays or hides your phone number to/from
the person you call. Contact your network
operator regarding ex-directory numbers.
4.2. Call waiting Be alerted during a phone call that there is
another incoming call.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 247
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure phone*
10
248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4.3. Auto answer Automatically answers incoming calls.
4.4. Call back Automatically calls a previously engaged num-
ber.
4.5. Voice mail number Stores voice mail number.
4.6. Diversion Choose when and what type of calls are to be
diverted to a specified phone number.
4.6.1. All calls (this setting only applies during
the call in progress).
4.6.2. When engag.
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Phone settings
5.1. Network Choose a network automatically or manually.
The selected network is shown in the display in
the phone's basic mode.
5.1.1. Auto
5.1.2. Manual select
5.2. SIM security Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the
phone should automatically give the PIN code.
5.2.1. On
5.2.2. Off
5.2.3. Automatic
5.3. Edit codes Change PIN or phone code. Write the codes
down and keep them in a safe place.
5.3.1. PIN code
5.3.2. Phone code. The factory-set phone
code 1234 is used until you change to
your own code.
5.4. Sounds 5.4.1. Volume Adjust the ring signal volume.
5.4.2. Ring signal. There are seven different
ring signals.
5.4.3. Mute radio. On/off
5.4.4. Msg. beep
5.5. IDIS If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming
calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving
situation.
5.5. Factory sett. Reset the system's factory settings.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 248
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249
General
G 02
95 03
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Centre console
BluetoothTM
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-
tem. The audio system then works handsfree,
with the option to control a range of the mobile
phone's functions remotely. The microphone is
fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone
can always be operated by its own keys irre-
spective of whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones is fully compatible with the handsfree function. Information on compatible phones is avail- able at Volvo dealers and at www.volvocars.com.
Menus and controls The menus are navigated using the control
panel in the centre console (3), see page 241.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con-
sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-
eral information on menus, see page 246.
Activating/deactivating A short press on PHONE activates the hands-
free function. The text PHONE at the top of the
display shows that it is in phone mode. The
symbol shows that the handsfree func-
tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the
handsfree function and disconnects a con-
nected phone.
Connect mobile phone A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been con-
nected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow the instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via BluetoothTM, see mobile phone manual
or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE.
> Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been registered
then these are also shown.
3. Select Add phone.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective BluetoothTM name in the dis-
play. The handsfree function's
BluetoothTM name is shown in the
mobile phone such as My Car.
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio
system display via the mobile phone key-
pad.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 249
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE. If there is a phone connected,
disconnect the connected phone.
2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see
the mobile phone manual.
3. Select My Car in the list of units detected
in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile
phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5. Select to connect to My Car from the
mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected
automatically to the audio system while the text
Synchronising is shown in the display. For
more information on how mobile phones are
registered, see page 251.
When the connection is established the symbol
is shown and the mobile phone Blue-
toothTM name is shown in the display. Now the
mobile phone can be controlled from the audio
system.
To call 1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown
at the top of the display and that the
symbol is visible.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 252.
3. Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. For more information on connection,
see page 251.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-
vating the handsfree function with one long
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is
also deactivated when the engine is switched
off or when a door is opened 1.
When the mobile phone has been discon-
nected an ongoing call can be continued with
the mobile phone's built-in microphone and
speaker.
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the
audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Auto answer The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically. Activate/
deactivate under Phone menu Phone
settings Call options Auto answer.
In-call menu Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call
to access the following functions:
Microphone muted - audio system microphone is muted.
Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.
1 Applies to Keyless Drive.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 250
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.
Phone book searching in the phone book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.
Audio settings
Call volume The call volume can be regulated when the
handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the
steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.
Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,
the audio system volume is controlled as usual
with VOLUME. In order to control audio system
volume during an ongoing call you have to
switch to one of the audio sources.
The audio source can be automatically muted
for incoming calls under Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to Phone menu Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring volume and
adjust with / on the navigation button.
Ring signals The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-
nals that can be selected under Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal 2, go to Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals Use mobile phone signal.
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg-
istered. Registration is performed once per
phone. After registration the phone no longer
needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of
one mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth
menu Bluetooth Remove phone.
Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the audio sys-
tem searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the display. To change over
to manual connection of another phone, press
EXIT.
Manual connection If you want to connect a mobile phone other
than the last connected or change the con-
nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
1. Set the audio system in phone mode.
2. Press PHONE and select one of the
phones in the list.
The connection can also be made via the menu
system under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth
Connect phone or Change phone.
2 Not supported by all mobile phones.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 251
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Phone book
All use of the phone book presupposes that the
text PHONE is shown at the top of the display
and that the symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each registered mobile phone. The
phone book is copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection. Deacti-
vate the function under Phone settings
Synchronise phone book. Searching for con-
tacts is only performed in the connected
mobile phone's phone book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Searching for contacts The easiest way to search in the phone book is
with long presses on the keys 29. This starts
a search in the phone book based on the key's
first letter.
The phone book can also be reached with /
on the navigation button or with / on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also
be performed from the phone book's Search
menu under Phone book Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and
press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to
call.
Voice recognition The mobile phone's voice recognition function
for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
Voice mail number Voice mail number can be changed under
Phone settings Call options Voice mail
number. If there is no number stored then this
menu can be reached with one long press on
1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored
number.
Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-
tion at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are
available under Call register.
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled calls in reverse order.
Inputting text Input text using the keypad in the centre con-
sole. Press once for the key's first character,
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for
more characters, see the table on page 243.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input
characters. / on the navigation button
scrolls between the characters.
Menu structure - Bluetooth
1. Missed calls
2. Received calls
3 Dialled calls
4. Phone book
4.1. Search
4.2. Copy from phone
5. Bluetooth...
5.1. Change phone
5.2. Connect phone
5.3. Disconnect phone
5.4. Connect from mobile phone
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 252
evastarck
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253
6. Phone settings
6.1. Call options
6.1.2. Auto reply
6.1.3. Voice mail number
6.2. Sounds and volume
6.3. IDIS
6.4. Synchronise phone book
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 253
evastarck
G 00
00 00
254
Type designation................................................................................... 256
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 258
Engine specifications............................................................................ 260
Engine oil............................................................................................... 262
Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 266
Fuel....................................................................................................... 268
Catalytic converter................................................................................ 272
Electrical system................................................................................... 273
Type approval....................................................................................... 275
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 254
evastarck
11 SPECIF ICATIONS
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 255
evastarck
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
256
G 03
20 86
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 256
evastarck
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
257
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number.
Label for parking heater.
Engine type designation, component and
serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber:
manual gearbox
automatic gearbox
VIN number (type and model year desig-
nation plus chassis number).
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 257
evastarck
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
258
Dimensions
G 01
74 02
Posi- tion in illus-
tration
Dimensions (mm)
A Wheelbase 2640
B Length 4582
C Load length, floor,
folded seat
850
D Boot lid, raised approx.
200
E1 Height 1400
Posi- tion in illus-
tration
Dimensions (mm)
E2 Height approx.
2000
F Front track 1550
G Rear track 1836
H Width 1770
I Width including door
mirrors
2025
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids. The weight of passen-
gers and accessories, such as a towbar and
towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table) etc., influences the payload and must not
be included in the kerb weight. Permitted
weight (in addition to driver) = Gross vehicle
weight - Kerb weight.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 258
evastarck
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
259
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
G 01
60 08
For decal location, see page 256.
Max. total weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Trailer with brakes:
Maximum trailer weight (kg)
Maximum tow- ball load (kg)
1500 75
Trailer without brakes
Maximum trailer weight (kg)
Maximum tow- ball load (kg)
700 50
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 259
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
260
Overview
2.4 2.4i T5
Engine designation B5244S5 B5244S4 B5254T7
Output (kW/rpm) 103/5000 125/6000 169/5000
Output (hp/rpm) 140/5000 170/6000 230/5000
Torque (Nm/rpm) 220/4000 230/4400 320/1500 5000
No. of cylinders 5 5 5
Bore (mm) 83 83 83
Stroke (mm) 90.0 90.0 93.2
Swept volume (litres) 2.44 2.44 2.52
Compression ratio 10.3:1 10.3:1 9.0:1
2.0D D5 D5 D5
Engine designation D4204T D5244T9 A D5244T8 D5244T13
Output (kW/rpm) 100/4000 120/4000 132/4000 132/4000
Output (hp/rpm) 136/4000 163/4000 180/4000 180/4000
Torque (Nm/rpm) 320/2000 340/1750 3000 350/1750 3250 400/2000 2750
No. of cylinders 4 5 5 5
Bore (mm) 85 81 81 81
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 260
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
261
2.0D D5 D5 D5
Stroke (mm) 88.0 93.2 93.2 93.2
Swept volume (litres) 2.00 2.40 2.40 2.40
Compression ratio 18.5:1 17.3:1 17.3:1 17.3:1
A Belgium
Engine type designation, component and serial
number can be read on the engine, see
page 256.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 261
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
262
Adverse driving conditions
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer.
in mountainous regions.
at high speeds.
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C.
This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-
ture or oil consumption.
Also check the oil level more often if the car is
often driven short distances (less than 10 km)
when temperatures are low (below +5 C).
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, other- wise you will risk affecting service life, star- ting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Viscosity chart
G 02
02 36
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 262
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
263
Oil decal
Engine oil grade
Engine variant Volume between
MIN-MAX (litres)
Volume A
(litres)
G 03
20 80
Oil decal location in engine compartment, see
page 201.
Oil grade: ACEA A3/B3/B4
Viscosity: SAE 0W30
When driving under adverse conditions, use
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
2.4 B B5244S5 1,3 5.8
2.4iB B5244S4 1,3 5.8
T5B B5254T7 1,3 5.8
A Including filter change B Does not apply to Europe, for Europe see oil ACEA A5/B5
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 263
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
264
Engine oil grade
Engine variant Volume between
MIN-MAX (litres)
Volume A
(litres)
G 03
20 79
Oil decal location in engine compartment, see
page 201.
Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B
Viscosity: SAE 5W30
When driving under adverse conditions, use
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
D5 D5244T8 1.5 6
D5244T9
D5244T13
2.0D D4204T 2.0 5.5
A Including filter change
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 264
evastarck
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
265
Engine oil grade
Engine variant Volume between
MIN-MAX (litres)
Volume A
(litres)
G 03
20 78
Oil decal location in engine compartment, see
page 201.
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W30
2.4 B5244S5 B 1,3 5.5
2.4i B5244S4 B 1,3 5.5
T5 B5254T7 B 1,3 5.5
D5 D5244T8 1.5 6
D5244T9
(Only Belgium)
D5244T13
A Including filter change B Europe only, for other markets see oil ACEA A3/B3/B4
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 265
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
266
Overview
IMPORTANT
The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. If the transmission is topped up with a dif- ferent fluid, contact an authorised Volvo workshop for servicing.
Gearbox oil
System Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade:
2.4 Manual 5-speed 2.1 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309
2.4i Manual 5 speed 2.1 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309
T5 Manual 6 speed 2.0 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309
T5 Automatic gearbox 7.75 Transmission fluid: JWS 3309
2.0D Manual 6 speed 1.7 Transmission fluid: BOT 130
2.0D Automatic gearbox 5.6 Transmission fluid: BOT 341
D5 Automatic gearbox 7.75 Transmission fluid: JWS 3309
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 266
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
267
Fluids
Fluid System Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade:
Coolant 5-cyl. manual gearbox 9.5 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with
water A, see packaging. The thermostat starts
opening at 90 C5-cyl. aut. gearbox 10.0
4-cyl. diesel 9.5
Air conditioning B - 180-200 grams Compressor oil PAG
500-600 grams Refrigerant R134a (HFC134a)
Brake fluid - 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering - 1.0-1.2 Power steering fluid: WSS M2C204-A or equivalent
product with same specifications.
Washer fluid 5 cyl. Petrol/Diesel 6.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo,
mixed with water for temperatures below freezing.
Fuel tank See the table below under Con-
sumption, emissions and volume.
A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Weights may vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact information.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 267
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
268
Consumption, emissions and volume
Engine Gearbox Consumption (litre/100 km)
Emissions of carbon dioxide CO2 (g/km)
Tank volume (litres)
2.4 B5244S5 Manual 5 speed M56 8.9 212 approx. 62
2.4 B5244S5 Automatic gearbox
(AW55-50/51)
9.6 229 approx. 62
2.4i B5244S4 Manual 5 speed (M56H) 9.0 215 approx. 62
2.4i B5244S4 Automatic gearbox
(AW55-50/51)
9.6 229 approx. 62
T5 B5254T7 Manual 6 speed (M66) 9.1 217 approx. 62
T5 B5254T7 Automatic gearbox
(AW55-50/51)
9.8 234 approx. 62
D5 D5244T8 Automatic gearbox
(AW55-51)
7.4 196 approx. 60
D5 D5244T9
(Only Belgium)
Automatic gearbox
(AW55-51)
7.3 193 approx. 60
D5 D5244T13 Manual 6 speed (M66) 6.6 174 approx. 60
2.0D D4204T (EURO3)
(EURO4)
Manual 6 speed (MMT6) 6.1 161 approx. 52
2.0D D4204T (EURO3)
(EURO4)
Automatic gearbox (MPS6) 6.3 167 approx. 52
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 268
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
269
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide Official fuel consumption figures are based on
a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU
Directive 80/1268 comb.
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car
is equipped with extra equipment that affects
the car's weight. The manner in which the car
is driven, and other non-technical factors can
also affect fuel consumption.
Consumption is higher and power output lower
for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
General information on fuel
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel splashing in the eyes.
If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
IMPORTANT
The use of other fuels for each respective engine type, other than recommended here by Volvo, could cause engine damage and impaired performance.
The use of other fuels also invalidates Vol- vo's warranties as well as any supplemen- tary service agreement.
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 91,
95 and 98 RON.
91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder engines and should only be used in excep- tional cases with other engines.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid dam- aging the catalytic converter.
In order for the Volvo warranty to apply, never mix alcohol with petrol, the fuel system could be damaged.
Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 269
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
270
Diesel
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants,
such as excessively high volumes of sulphur
particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from
well-known producers. Never use diesel of
dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-40 C to -6 C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
can lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-
peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-
cipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used: special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel oil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
IMPORTANT
For model year 2006 or later the sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.
Empty tank No special procedures are required if the tank
runs dry. The fuel system is bled automatically
if the ignition switch is kept in position II for
approx. 60 seconds before the start attempt.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-
tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil-
ter, which results in more efficient emission
control. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving. So-
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-
ically at an interval of approximately 300900
km depending on driving conditions. Regener-
ation normally takes between 10 and 20
minutes. It may take a little longer at a low
average speed. Fuel consumption may
increase slightly during regeneration.
The rear window heating may be activated
automatically to increase the load on the
engine during regeneration without warning.
Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 270
evastarck
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately
80% full of particles, the yellow information
symbol on the instrument panel illuminates,
and the message SOOT FILTER FULL SEE
OWNER MANUAL is shown on the instrument
panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for
approximately 20 minutes more.
When regeneration is complete the message is
cleared automatically.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of functioning. Then it can be difficult to start the engine and there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 271
evastarck
11 Specifications
Catalytic converter
11
272
General
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of
exhaust gases close to the engine so that it
quickly reaches operating temperature. The
catalytic converter consists of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum,
rhodium and palladium. These metals act as
catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate
a chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. Together with the three-way catalytic
converter, these adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion of the
harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon
monoxide and nitrous oxides).
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 272
evastarck
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
273
General
12 V system with a voltage-regulated alterna-
tor. Single pole system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors.
If the battery is changed, replace it with a bat-
tery of the same cold start capacity and reserve
capacity as the original (see the decal on the
battery).
Battery
Voltage 4 and 5 cyl. petrol 4 and 5 cyl. petrol 4 and 5 cyl. diesel
Cold start capacity (CCA) 590 A 600 A A 700 A B
Reserve capacity (RC) 100 min 120 min 135 min
Capacity (Ah) 60 70 80
A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system. B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.
Bulbs
Lighting Output (W) Type
Dipped beam 55 H7
Main beam 55 H9
Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp 21 P21W
Direction indicators, rear/front 21 PY21W
Rear position/parking lamps, rear side marker
lamps
4 P21/5W
Courtesy lighting, cargo area lighting, number
plate lighting
5 C5W
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 273
evastarck
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lighting Output (W) Type
Vanity mirror* 1.2 Tubular lamp
Front position/parking lamps, front side marker
lamps
5 W5W
Fog lamps 55 H8
Glovebox lighting 3 Tubular lamp
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 274
evastarck
11 Specifications
Type approval
11
275
Remote control system
Country and region
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,
E, EST, F, FIN, GB,
GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,
LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,
SK, SLO
Delphi hereby
certifies that this
remote control sys-
tem conforms to the
essential character-
istic requirements
and other relevant
regulations of direc-
tive 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,
Germany R-
LPD1-03-0151
BR
TW
ETC093LPD0155
Certification of the Keyless Drive system
Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifies
that this equipment type 5WK4 8952,
5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to the
essential characteristic requirements and other
relevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 275
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
276
A
A/C
electronic climate control..................... 82
ABS fault............................................ 47, 145
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 168
Bi-Xenon headlamp......................... 168
Halogen headlamp............................. 168
AF automatic frequency update........... 233
Airbag........................................................ 20
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 23
deactivating/activating......................... 23
driver's and front passenger side......... 21
Air conditioning
ECC...................................................... 80
general.................................................. 78
Air distribution............................................ 84
ECC...................................................... 82
Air quality system, ECC............................. 81
Air vents..................................................... 79
Alarm........................................................ 126
alarm indicator.................................... 126
arming................................................. 126
automatic alarm activation................. 127
deactivating a triggered alarm............ 127
disarming............................................ 126
RDS traffic warning............................. 231
reduced alarm level............................ 127
testing the alarm system.................... 128
Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 120
Approach light, duration............................ 70
setting................................................... 72
Audio, see also Sound............................. 226
Audio volume
phone.......................................... 243, 251
phone/media player............................ 251
ring signal, phone............................... 251
AUTO
climate control settings........................ 80
storing stations................................... 230
AUTO CLIMATE......................................... 80
Automatic car washes............................. 190
Automatic gearbox
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 141
towing and recovery........................... 155
trailer................................................... 159
Automatic locking.................................... 124
Automatic relocking................................. 123
Autostart.................................................. 136
auto volume control................................. 229
Auxiliary heater.......................................... 88
Average fuel consumption......................... 56
B
Bass speaker........................................... 228
Battery..................................................... 207
maintenance............................... 199, 207
overload.............................................. 133
replacing the battery in the remote con-
trol....................................................... 121
specifications...................................... 273
start assistance................................... 158
symbols on the battery....................... 207
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 151
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 70, 151
Bluetooth
handsfree............................................ 249
mute microphone............................... 250
transfer call to mobile......................... 250
Boarding
rear seat................................................ 92
Bonnet, opening...................................... 200
Boot lid
driving with open boot lid................... 132
locking/unlocking................................ 122
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 276
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
277
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 204
Brake light.................................................. 54
Brakes
Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 145
brake light............................................. 54
Emergency brake assistance, EBA..... 146
emergency brake light, EBL................. 54
handbrake............................................. 64
Brake system........................................... 145
Bulb holder
removal............................................... 212
Bulbs
changing............................................. 209
Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 209, 273
C
Calls
functions during a call................ 242, 245
incoming............................................. 250
operation..................................... 242, 250
volume in phone................................. 243
Car care................................................... 190
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 192
Cargo area............................................... 106
cargo separator.................................. 106
electrical socket.................................. 108
loading assistance.............................. 106
load retaining eyelets.......................... 107
ski hatch............................................. 108
Car settings................................................ 71
Car upholstery......................................... 192
Car wash.................................................. 190
Catalytic converter................................... 272
recovery.............................................. 155
CD discs
storage compartment......................... 104
CD functions............................................ 235
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 203
Checks
fluids and oils...................................... 202
Children..................................................... 34
child seats and side airbags................. 25
location in the car................................. 34
location in the car, table....................... 35
safety.................................................... 34
Child seat................................................... 34
Child seats................................................. 34
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 37
Cigarette lighter socket
front seat............................................... 52
Cleaning
automatic car washes......................... 190
car wash............................................. 190
rims..................................................... 190
seatbelts............................................. 193
upholstery........................................... 192
Climate control
general.................................................. 78
personal preferences............................ 71
Climate control settings
AUTO.................................................... 80
Clock, adjustment...................................... 71
Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 204
Coat hanger............................................. 103
Cold start................................................. 143
automatic gearbox.............................. 143
Collision
crash mode........................................... 33
Colour code, paint................................... 194
Combined instrument panel...................... 45
Compass.................................................... 67
calibration............................................. 67
setting the zone.................................... 67
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 277
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
278
Condensation in headlamps.................... 190
Coolant.................................................... 203
Cooling system........................................ 132
Crash, see Collision................................... 33
Cruise control............................................ 60
D
Deadlocks................................................ 124
deactivation........................................ 124
temporary deactivation....................... 124
Diesel....................................................... 270
Diesel: engine preheater............................ 47
Diesel particle filter.................................. 270
Direction indicators.................................... 55
Disc text................................................... 236
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 143
Display, messages..................................... 50
Display lighting.......................................... 54
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 224, 228
Door mirrors............................................... 69
Driver's door control panel.................. 44, 65
Driving
cooling system.................................... 132
economical......................................... 132
in water............................................... 132
slippery driving conditions.................. 132
with trailer........................................... 159
Driving in water........................................ 132
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 258
towing capacity.................................. 258
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 147
DSTC, see also Stability system
symbol.................................................. 47
During a call, functions............................ 245
E
Economical driving.................................. 132
ECO pressure.......................................... 176
table.................................................... 176
Electrical socket
cargo area........................................... 108
centre console...................................... 52
Electrical system...................................... 273
Emergency calls....................................... 240
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 179
Emergency puncture repair..................... 184
Emission control
fault indicator........................................ 47
Engine compartment............................... 200
coolant................................................ 203
power steering fluid............................ 205
Engine oil......................................... 202, 262
adverse driving conditions.................. 262
capacities........................................... 262
filter..................................................... 201
oil grade.............................................. 262
oil pressure........................................... 48
Engine specifications............................... 260
Entry, keyless............................................. 72
EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 233
Equalizer.................................................. 228
Error messages.......................................... 97
Error messages in BLIS........................... 153
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External dimensions................................ 258
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 278
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
279
F
Fan
ECC...................................................... 80
Fast-wind................................................. 236
First aid equipment.................................. 181
Floor mats.................................................. 93
Fluids, capacities..................................... 266
Fluids and oils.................................. 201, 266
Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart-
ment......................................................... 201
Fluids and oils general............................. 201
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 54
Fog lamps, on/off....................................... 54
Frequency update, automatic.................. 233
Fuel
fuel consumption, display..................... 56
fuel economy...................................... 176
level indicator........................................ 47
parking heater....................................... 85
refuelling............................................. 134
Fuses....................................................... 215
box in the engine compartment.......... 216
changing............................................. 215
general................................................ 215
relay/fuse box in the passenger com-
partment............................................. 219
G
Gearbox
manual................................................ 139
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 142
Geartronic................................................ 141
Glovebox.................................................. 103
Locking............................................... 114
Gross vehicle weight............................... 258
H
Handbrake................................................. 64
Hazard warning flashers............................ 63
Headlamps................................................. 53
Heating
front seats............................................. 82
rearview and door mirrors.............. 70, 82
rear window.......................................... 82
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 58
HomeLink EU.......................................... 73
Home safe lighting............................... 55, 70
setting................................................... 72
I
IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys-
tem........................................................... 240
Ignition keys............................................. 137
IMEI number............................................ 245
Immobiliser...................................... 112, 137
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 27
Information display.................................... 50
Infotainment system
menus................................................. 224
Instrument lighting..................................... 54
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 40
right-hand drive.................................... 42
Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 100
Interior rearview mirror............................... 67
automatic dimming............................... 67
Intermittent wiping..................................... 58
iPod, connection...................................... 227
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 279
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
280
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 37
J
Jack......................................................... 179
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 258
Key
keyless lock and ignition system........ 118
remote control key.............................. 112
Key blade......................................... 113, 119
active locks......................................... 117
Keyless drive............................ 118, 138, 275
starting the car.................................... 138
Keyless entry............................................. 72
Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 118
Keypad in the steering wheel...... 60, 62, 241
Kick-down
automatic gearbox.............................. 141
L
Lambda-sond.......................................... 272
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 192
Lighting
approach light, duration....................... 70
automatic lighting............................... 101
automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 53
bulbs, specifications........................... 273
dipped beam........................................ 53
display lighting...................................... 54
front fog lamps..................................... 54
headlamp levelling................................ 53
home safe lighting.......................... 55, 70
in passenger compartment................. 100
Lighting panel, passenger compart-
ment...................................................... 53
main/dipped beam......................... 53, 55
position/parking lamps......................... 53
reading lamps..................................... 100
rear fog lamp........................................ 54
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 209
cargo area........................................... 213
courtesy lighting................................. 213
dipped beam...................................... 210
direction indicators............................. 211
fog lamp.............................................. 212
front.................................................... 209
interior lighting, roof............................ 214
main beam.......................................... 210
number plate lighting.......................... 213
parking lamps..................................... 211
position lamps.................................... 211
rear lamp............................................. 212
side marker lamps.............................. 211
vanity mirror........................................ 214
Loading
general................................................ 167
load capacity...................................... 167
load retaining eyelets.......................... 107
ski hatch............................................. 108
Load retaining eyelets.............................. 107
Locking.................................................... 119
unlocking............................................ 122
Locking/unlocking................................... 122
inside.................................................. 123
outside................................................ 122
Locks
Locking............................................... 122
Lubricants................................................ 266
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 266
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 280
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
281
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 53
Main beam
flashing................................................. 55
Main beam "flash"..................................... 55
Maintenance............................................ 199
rustproofing........................................ 195
self-maintenance................................ 199
Making calls..................................... 242, 250
Manual gearbox....................................... 139
towing and recovery........................... 155
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 141
Memory function in seats.......................... 94
Menus
audio system...................................... 224
Menu structure........................................... 71
media player....................................... 238
phone, menu options.......................... 247
phone, overview................................. 246
Messages in BLIS.................................... 153
Messages in the information display......... 50
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge............................................. 45
outside temperature gauge.................. 45
speedometer......................................... 45
tachometer........................................... 45
trip meter.............................................. 45
Misting
attending to the windows..................... 78
condensation in headlamps............... 190
removing with defroster function.......... 81
timer function........................................ 81
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 251
handsfree............................................ 249
register phone..................................... 249
N
NEWS...................................................... 232
O
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 202, 262
One-key dial............................................. 244
Oxyhydrogen gas..................................... 158
P
PACOS....................................................... 23
PACOS, switch.......................................... 23
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 194
damage and touch-up........................ 194
Parking assistance................................... 149
parking assistance sensors................ 150
Parking brake....................................... 48, 64
Parking heater
battery and fuel..................................... 85
general.................................................. 85
parking on a hill.................................... 85
symbols and display messages............ 86
time setting........................................... 87
Particle filter............................................. 270
Passenger compartment filter................... 78
Personal preferences................................. 71
approach light, duration....................... 72
auto blower adjust................................ 71
automatic locking................................. 72
doors unlock......................................... 72
home safe lighting................................ 72
keyless entry......................................... 72
lock confirm. light................................. 71
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 281
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
282
recirculation timer................................. 71
unlock confirm. light............................. 71
Petrol grade............................................. 269
Phone
calling from the phone book............... 244
connect............................................... 251
controls............................................... 241
entering text........................................ 243
handsfree............................................ 249
incoming calls..................................... 250
making calls........................................ 250
on/off.................................................. 242
one-key dial........................................ 244
phone book......................................... 252
phone book, shortcut......................... 252
receiving a call.................................... 250
register phone..................................... 249
standby, standby mode...................... 242
traffic safety........................................ 241
Phone book
handling numbers............................... 243
Phone system.......................................... 240
Polishing.................................................. 191
Power seat................................................. 93
Power steering fluid, checking and topping
up............................................................. 205
Power windows......................................... 65
passenger seat..................................... 66
Privacy locking......................................... 115
Programme type...................................... 233
PTY Programme type............................ 232
Puncture, see Tyres......................... 179, 182
Putting calls on hold................................ 242
R
Radio
EON.................................................... 233
frequency update................................ 233
NEWS................................................. 232
programme types............................... 231
radio settings...................................... 230
radio stations...................................... 230
REG.................................................... 233
Radio text................................................ 233
Rain sensor................................................ 59
Random, CD and audio files.................... 236
RDS functions.......................................... 231
resetting.............................................. 234
Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 100
Rear seat
boarding............................................... 92
Rearview and door mirrors
automatic retracting/extending...... 69, 71
compass............................................... 67
door...................................................... 69
electrically retractable........................... 69
heating.................................................. 70
interior................................................... 67
Recirculation
ECC...................................................... 81
Reduced guard
settings................................................. 71
Refrigerant................................................. 78
Refuelling
fuel cap............................................... 134
fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 134
fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 134
refuelling............................................. 134
Refusing a call......................................... 242
REG - Regional radio programmes......... 233
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 215
Remote control........................................ 112
functions............................................. 112
programmable...................................... 73
replacing the battery........................... 121
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 282
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
283
Remote control key
battery replacement............................ 121
detachable key blade......................... 113
Remote control system, type approval.... 275
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 69
Reverse gear inhibitor
five-speed........................................... 139
six-speed, petrol................................. 139
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 190
Roof
error messages..................................... 97
hatch cover........................................... 96
lowering................................................ 95
opening and closing............................. 96
temporary covering............................... 98
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)......... 30
Rustproofing............................................ 195
S
Safety
safety systems, table............................ 31
SCAN
CD and audio files.............................. 236
radio stations...................................... 231
Seatbelt
pregnancy............................................. 17
seatbelt guide....................................... 18
seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seats
manual setting...................................... 92
power seat............................................ 93
Service programme................................. 198
Side airbags............................................... 25
SIM card.................................................. 240
SIPS bags.................................................. 25
Ski hatch.................................................. 108
SMS......................................................... 245
read..................................................... 245
write.................................................... 245
Soot filter........................................... 50, 270
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 270
Sound
audio settings............................. 226, 228
audio source....................................... 226
volume................................................ 226
Spare wheel............................................. 179
Temporary spare........................ 174, 179
Spin control............................................. 147
SRS AIRBAG.............................................. 20
SRS system............................................... 20
general.................................................. 20
Stability and traction control system....... 147
Stains....................................................... 192
Standby, phone....................................... 242
Start assistance....................................... 158
Starting the engine................................... 136
keyless drive............................... 118, 138
Steering lock............................................ 136
Steering wheel
cruise control........................................ 60
keypad.................................... 60, 62, 241
steering wheel adjustment.................... 63
Stone chips and scratches...................... 194
Storage compartment.............................. 102
CD discs............................................. 104
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 283
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
284
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 102
Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 230
Subwoofer............................................... 228
Surround.......................................... 224, 228
Symbols................................................... 148
indicator symbols........................... 47, 48
warning symbols................................... 46
Symbols and display messages
parking heater....................................... 86
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking................................ 112
Temperature
passenger compartment, electronic cli-
mate control.......................................... 83
Testing the alarm system......................... 128
Timer
ECC...................................................... 81
Tools........................................................ 179
Total airing function................................. 122
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 161
Towing..................................................... 155
towing eye.......................................... 156
Towing capacity....................................... 258
Towing equipment................................... 161
installation........................................... 163
removing............................................. 165
specifications...................................... 162
Towing eye............................................... 156
TP Traffic information............................ 232
Traffic information.................................... 232
Trailer....................................................... 159
cable................................................... 161
Trip computer............................................ 56
Tuning Radio............................................ 230
Type approved, remote control system... 275
Type designation..................................... 256
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 175
driving characteristics......................... 172
general................................................ 172
maintenance....................................... 172
pressure...................................... 176, 177
puncture repair................................... 184
specifications...................................... 172
speed ratings...................................... 172
tread wear indicators.......................... 173
winter tyres......................................... 175
U
Unlocking......................................... 119, 122
settings................................................. 71
USB, connection...................................... 227
V
Ventilation.................................................. 79
Vibration damper..................................... 161
Volume
audio system...................................... 226
auto volume control............................ 229
media player....................................... 226
programme types............................... 234
W
Warning lamp
stability and traction control system. . 147
Warning symbol, AIRBAG system............. 19
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 284
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
285
Warning triangle....................................... 179
Washer fluid, filling................................... 203
Washers
headlamps............................................ 58
washer fluid, filling.............................. 203
windscreen........................................... 58
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 70
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 192
Waxing..................................................... 191
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 258
Wheels
changing............................................. 182
installation........................................... 183
removal............................................... 182
rims..................................................... 174
snow chains........................................ 173
spare wheel........................................ 179
Whiplash injury........................................... 28
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 28
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 28
whiplash injury...................................... 28
Wind deflector........................................... 99
Windscreen wipers.................................... 58
rain sensor............................................ 59
Winter tyres.............................................. 175
Wiper blades............................................ 206
cleaning.............................................. 206
replacing, windscreen......................... 206
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 285
evastarck
12 Alphabetical Index
12
286
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 286
evastarck
Notes
287
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 287
evastarck
Notes
288
C70; 7; 3 2008-03-06T09:15:10+01:00; Page 288
evastarck
Related manuals for Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the C70 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo C70 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo C70. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo C70 2009 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.